JP2019083927A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which device to a performance is made in an advantageous state during special symbol variation based on a specific start condition which is executed after an advantageous state is completed.SOLUTION: A game machine acquires lottery information when receiving a game medium to a start port, controls an advantageous state, executes a special symbol variation when a special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, stores and holds the lottery information when the game medium is received in the start port and the special symbol variation start condition is not satisfied, has a first special symbol variation based on first lottery information acquired at the time of reception of a game medium in a first start port and a second special symbol variation based on second lottery information acquired at the time of reception of a game medium in a second start port, and executes a performance having different modes between a second special symbol variation in a first period and a second special symbol variation in the second period, where a special period including the first and second periods capable of executing a held plurality of second special symbol variations exists after the completion of the advantageous state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 165

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Conventionally, based on the fact that the game ball has won in the starting opening, a lottery is made to determine whether or not a big hit is made, and a symbol is variably displayed on the display device, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode according to the lottery result. When the result is a big hit, a gaming machine is known which causes the display device to stop and display a big hit symbol and generate a big hit gaming state.

  In addition, there have been proposed a large number of gaming machines that are controlled to an advantageous state in which the probability of satisfying a specific start condition is increased after the end of the jackpot gaming state as compared to the normal time (for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, the advantageous state ends when the special symbol fluctuation of a predetermined number of times is executed, but immediately after the end of the advantageous state, the special symbol fluctuation based on the specific starting condition can be executed a predetermined number of times Exists.

JP, 2016-26097, A

  However, in the gaming machine in which an advantageous state exists, there is room for further devising an effect during special symbol fluctuation based on a specific starting condition executed after the advantageous state ends.

  Then, an object of this invention is to provide the gaming machine in which the device for the special symbol variation effect based on the specific starting condition executed after the end of the advantageous state is provided.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention adopts the following configuration. The gaming machine controls the advantageous state which starts when the advantageous state start condition is established and ends when the advantageous state end condition is established, and the lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information when the gaming medium is received to the predetermined starting opening. The special condition variation control means, the special symbol variation execution means for executing the special symbol variation based on the lottery information when the special symbol variation start condition is established, and the special symbol of the game medium being received in the predetermined starting opening If the establishment of the change start condition is not satisfied, the special symbol change period by the special symbol change execution means based on the holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with the predetermined number as the upper limit and the lottery information And an effect execution unit for executing an effect, wherein the lottery information is acquired at the time of receiving the game medium to the first starting opening included in the predetermined starting opening. The first lottery information and the second lottery information acquired at the time of receiving the game medium to the second starting opening which is included in the predetermined starting opening and which is different from the first starting opening, includes the special symbol variation There is a first special symbol fluctuation based on the first lottery information and a second special symbol fluctuation based on the second lottery information, and corresponds to the holding of the second lottery information stored by the holding means The special period during which a plurality of consecutive second special symbol variations can be performed exists after the end of the advantageous state, and the effect executing means executes the second special symbol variation executed during the first period included in the special period. And the second special symbol variation performed in the second period included in the special period, performing an effect of a different aspect (for example, paragraph [1096] to paragraph [1279], figure 154 to 174 etc. Irradiation).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a device for creating special symbol variation based on a specific start condition executed after the end of the advantageous state is devised.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of a pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position from the right front. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and seen from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled a handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer base unit in a saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in a saucer unit from the direction of movement of a production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation button unit and was seen from the front lower. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a rotational drive unit in the left view of a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board | substrate in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, (c) is a central pressing operation section of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a plate unit when pressing. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit into every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the back sectional view which cut the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the front-back direction center of a delivery blade. (A) is a back sectional view which cut a dispensing device in the front-back direction center of a dispensing blade, when a ball extraction movable piece is an open state, (b) is a sectional view cut by the AA line in (a) . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine which was cut at the center in the lateral direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the game area where the game ball in a game board distributes. It is a front view of the center role and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. It is side sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the table | surface production | presentation unit with the center part goods in the left-right direction center, and was seen from the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a table | surface rendering unit, and the reflective recessed part of a surface light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a front light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which made the lower front center decoration body light-emit in a lower movable presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which made the lower front center decoration base rise in the lower movable presentation unit and made the lower front center decoration body and the lower back center decoration body emit light. Lower lower central lift base, lower left side lift base and lower right side lift base in lower movable effect unit to raise lower front center decoration, lower back center decoration, lower left side decoration and lower right side decoration It is a front view of a game board shown in the state where it was made to go. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing board of the effect operating unit is at the raised position with the gaming board in the state of FIG. 108. The four rotating decorations in the lower movable rendering unit, the left side rotating decoration, the left sub-side rotating decoration, the right side rotating decoration, and the right sub-side rotating decoration are developed respectively to schematically show the decoration of the decoration on each surface FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow by which light emission display is carried out in a lower movable presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is an explanatory view showing roughly the drive mechanism of the upper back movable presentation unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper front movable decoration of the upper front movable effect unit. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by main control MPU, (b) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the interruption process regularly performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the collision determination processing performed by main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing for hits, (B) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing for jackpot types, and (C) is a type for small hit It is a small hitting symbol determination table used in the lottery process for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU. (A) is a common drawing determination table used for lottery processing per common drawing, and (B) is a common use time opening pattern table used for determination processing for an open pattern per common drawing. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the usual symbol change processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the usual symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the common motorized goods opening processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16 mS steady process performed by periphery control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production control processing performed by periphery control MPU. (A) is a suspension notice determination table used to determine a suspension notice pattern at 1:00, and (B) is a suspension notice determination table used to determine a suspension notice pattern at 2:00 (C Is a pending notice determination table used to determine a pending notice pattern at 3 o'clock. (D) is a suspension notice determination table used to determine a suspension notice pattern at 4 o'clock. It is a pending change production determination table used for determination of a pending change production pattern. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of execution of the on-hold movement change effect as the on-hold change effect. It is an example of the production | presentation display of the presentation display apparatus at the time of execution of a holding | placing change presentation, as a holding | gaging change presentation. It is an example of the production | presentation display of the presentation display apparatus at the time of execution of a billiards suspension change presentation as suspension change presentation. (A) is an over prize occurrence determination table for the number of over prize occurrences = 1, 3, 5 and 7 o'clock, (B) is an over prize occurrence determination table for the number of over prize occurrences = 2: (C) is the over prize winning effect determination table at the number of occurrences of over prize = 4: (D) is the over prize winning effect determination table for the number of occurrences of over prize = 6: (E) is the over It is an over winning combination effect determination table after the number of winning occurrences = 8. It is an example of the production | presentation display of the production | presentation display apparatus at the time of execution of a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light-guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light-guide plate. It is a table which shows an example of a big hit probability and a small hit probability. It is a table which shows an example of the pattern of opening time and closing time of big winning a prize mouth selected in each round of a big hit game or a small hit game. (A) is a table showing an example of the time of hit start effect (also referred to as opening effect), and (B) is a table showing an example of the time of final hit effect (also called ending effect). It is a table which shows an example of an operation schedule of a big winning a prize mouth in a big hit game. It is a table which shows an example of an operation schedule of a big winning a prize mouth in small hit game. It is an enlarged front view showing an example of an outline of composition in the first big winning a prize mouth. It is a timing chart which shows the operation schedule of the movable body in the 1st big winning a prize mouth in small hit game. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the production | presentation when stock can be acquired in stock time production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the production | presentation when stock can be acquired in stock time production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the production | presentation when a stock can not be acquired in stock time production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the production | presentation when a stock can not be acquired in stock time production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the production | presentation when a stock can not be acquired in stock time production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the production | presentation when a stock can not be acquired in stock time production | presentation. It is a table showing an example of the fluctuation time of each of the second special symbol fluctuation from the first to the fifth since the start of the time saving state. It is a table showing an example of the change time of each of the second special symbol change of the sixth to eighth times since the start of the time saving state. It is an example of a change pattern table selection table. It is an example of a stock time production block table. It is an example of a stock presentation specific table. (A) is an explanatory view showing a time schedule when winning a small hit in the first special symbol variation corresponding to winning in the time saving state, (B) is a first special symbol corresponding to winning in the time saving state It is explanatory drawing which shows the time schedule at the time of winning a big hit by fluctuation. Is an example of a judge effect table.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position from the right front is there. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is inserted.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 Attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame upper member 30, the lower end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the main body The frame lower hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be able to open and close in a forward direction centering on the left side in a front view.

  In the door frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to partially cover the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-reversed and radiated forward to allow the player to hear a more deep bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained also by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2. The main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner, the main frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and the game The ball launch device 540 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, the payout base unit 550 which receives the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the game received by the payout base unit 550 A game unit attached to a main unit frame base 501, a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 having a power supply substrate 630 and a payout control substrate 633, and A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square in a front view, It is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 disposed at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game A table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emission effects according to the game state.

  In the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails which are in contact with the gaming ball B and are installed in a predetermined gauge array, and a predetermined benefit for the player by receiving or passing the gaming ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006; Is equipped. The obstacle nail is implanted on the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2006 etc. The player can enjoy the operation of hitting the handle 182 as accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, or a table effect unit 2600, lower movable effect The player can be entertained by causing the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like to perform movable effects and light emission effects.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically.

  The outer frame 2 is, as shown in the figure, separated from the left and right and extending vertically, the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. Outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends, outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20, and upper surface of outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-reversed and emitted forward.

  The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 of the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable to the front centering on the left side in a front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend in the vertical direction, and are disposed apart from each other in the left and right direction. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially rotatably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 has an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And the lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame left member 11 is a portion from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a which is recessed to the right in a flat shape in the rear side portion of the left side in the front-rear direction divided into three, and the right side from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a The bulging part 11b bulging toward the direction and the hollow part 11c which penetrates the bulging part 11b up and down are provided. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 11c.

  Moreover, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed to be symmetrical with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b at the left side of 12a is provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a of the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally and a flat upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat contact portion 13d which extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and brings the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hooking member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame right member 21 is provided with a recess 21a recessed leftwardly in a flat shape at the rear side of the right and left sides of the right and left sides from the front and back, and a left side from the side opposite to the recess 21a in the left side A bulging portion 21 b bulging in the direction, and a hollow portion 21 c penetrating the bulging portion 21 b up and down are provided. The outer frame right member 21 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the recessed portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side is formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side is formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the right side 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and further front side And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the lower surface of the right end of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout 30a of the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state in which the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut the upper surface of the right end of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout 41a of the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are members to which an outer frame collar 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later is hooked. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21 And a flat plate-like locking piece portion 24b on which the outer frame collar 653 at the upper side is locked.

  The lower hooking member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left from a flat mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 The flat-plate shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame collar 653 is locked and the insertion through which the lower outer frame collar 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a which is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

  Moreover, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with the attachment step part 30b in which the upper surface and front surface were recessed rather than the general surface in the left side edge part. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 spaced apart to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right, and extends in the left and right direction; A box-shaped front curtain member 42 which is disposed forward of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain member 42 And a box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extending forwardly open, and a ball biting prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a which is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and is provided with a recess 41 b into which the lower portion of the rear curtain plate member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41 b extends in the left and right direction, and extends from the rear position of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recessed portion 41 b widens the volume of the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate formed by the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 as much as possible.

  The front curtain plate member 42 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height The entire rear side is open. The front curtain member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear curtain plate member 43 so as to cooperate with the rear curtain plate member 43 to be part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 The space 40a is formed. The front curtain member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The rear curtain plate member 43 has a length in the left-right direction extending slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape whose front is open. The rear curtain plate member 43 cooperates with the front curtain plate member 42 to form the inner curtain plate space 40 a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 by attaching the front curtain plate member 42 to the front. The rear curtain plate member 43 has a cylindrical connection cylindrical portion 43a which extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward and communicates with the inner curtain plate space 40a at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylindrical portion 43 a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear curtain plate 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylindrical portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction which is about 1/3 the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and a depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. Is also formed slightly short. In the connection cylindrical portion 43a, a plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In communication with the internal space of 620 a, an enclosure 624 is formed.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the gaming ball B is retained at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the gaming ball B is held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is for preventing that it is pinched.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is provided with a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 to be described later may be involved; A first discharge port 44b opened upward at the left end of the left end 44a, and a second discharge port 44c opened upward on the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a; An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the resting portion 44a, and an upper end projection projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and inclined to be positioned upward as the upper surface goes rearward And a unit 44e.

  The first discharge port 44 b is formed at a position that matches the discharge hole 60 d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open at the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the gaming ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, when the ball biting preventing mechanism 44 is inserted into a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire is inserted. The rising wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tool entry. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, even if it is bent upward, it abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end projecting portion 44e provided on the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent action from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the gaming ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is blocked by 44d, the gaming ball B is easily retained on the placement portion 44a. Then, when the game ball B is staying on the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 can not be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is firstly discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The lower outer frame assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front and rear curtain plate members 42 and 43 at a distance to the left and right and the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front and rear direction and attached to the inside of the front curtain plate member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46; And a frame-like seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the pair of guide members 45. The guide member 45 is formed of a low friction material having low friction resistance, and the lower end of the main body frame 4 is made slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain inner space 40 a (the enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonate and amplify the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (in the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (player's side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass.

  The seal member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame and upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. Fig.21 (a) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2, and was seen from the front upper side, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 extends from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a to the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends horizontally from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extension 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending to the left and right center of the front extension 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion The plate-like horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from the end edge to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open from the left side to the front side of the front extension 51b And a flat plate-like end edge wall 51e which is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front and rear direction, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left side extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally forward to the left and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the rear end of the lock main body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to abut on a portion of the edge wall 51e which extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the attachment hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion on the front side of the lock main body 52a in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view by rotating the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end moves leftward by the operation of the operation piece 52b, and the bearing groove 51c Can be completely through. Thereby, the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. And an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a; and a discharge hole 60d which has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through vertically through the horizontal portion 60a. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached at a left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and extends in a reverse U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The lower portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the state assembled to the outer frame 2, and a screw not shown Is fixed to the rear curtain member 43 by the Further, the rising portion 60 b is attached to a portion on the front side of the bulging portion 11 b in the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60 d matches the first discharge port 44 b of the anti-ball bite mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between 4 and 4 gradually narrows, it rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be more easily prevented from rolling backward than the main frame 4 by discharging the game balls B from the discharge holes 60 d. It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball B to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 22 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a substantially the same size as the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 can be attached openably from the front side It is done. The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in the front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 which is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4 A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a crime prevention cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner, a pan unit 200 mounted to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and a front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the pan unit 200. Door frame left side unit 400 and the door attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit A right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101 a which is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically, and the front right of the door frame base 101 Handle attachment member 102 attached below, speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and attached near the rear end right end in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the left side A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the rear handlebar relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104, and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handlebar relay board 106 from the rear side A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and a door A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the gaming balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 which can be operated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 can be inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing the game which is thrown into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31 (a) is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side in a front view in a hinge rotatable manner with respect to the main body frame 4 and closes the front of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle attachment member 102 attached to the front lower right of the door frame base 101 for attaching the handle unit 180. And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in a rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in the rear view in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 A door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the substrate 104 and a handle back relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, the door frame base 101 The back handle handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the back of the handlebar and covers the handle back handle relay board 106 from the back side, and is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 to cover the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-like door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 180 is in the front lower corner, the dish unit 200 is in the lower front of the door window 101a, the door frame left side unit 400 is in the front left outside of the door window 101a, and A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass frame 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and the transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the door window 101a formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 101 up and down It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101 a penetrating in the front and back direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the front right lower corner of the front view and is inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the front end and the insertion recess 101c in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth in the cylinder lock 130 The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b are penetrated back and forth in front view left side, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the

  The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates the ball outlet 150d of the far cover unit 150 forward for the lower bowl ball A passing hole 101f, a ball passing hole 101g for the upper tray which penetrates forward and backward through the ball passage 150a of the far cover unit 150 so as to penetrate forward and backward adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view And a glass unit attachment portion 101h into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, which is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed at the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate) in a front view and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i has the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200 located forward and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101 j which passes through in the front and rear direction below the door window 101 a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101 b. A wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the plate unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101 j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 to be described later penetrates It is formed to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1 b. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 102a, and a tubular A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c which project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a The outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a are provided.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102 b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. The three ridges 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state in which the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similar inclined state.

[3-1 c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. When the speaker duct 103 is in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 The player can be favorably guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker opening 211 b of the dish unit base 211.

  Moreover, the speaker duct 103 is equipped with the cable holder 103a which hold | maintains the connection cable 503 in the back surface of the downward direction of a cylindrical site | part. The cable holder 103 a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is the same as that of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1 d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle back relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle back relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay substrate 104 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle back relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. And FIG. 84) are connected.

  The outer shape of the door frame sub relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending right and left on the front view right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically is combined and extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left of the frame main relay board 104 in a rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 and the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay substrate 104 and the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 with the door frame base unit 100 assembled are The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the rear cover unit 150.

  The handle back relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting surface 101 b below the ball feeding opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle back relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. To relay the When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the handle back relay board 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered by the handle back relay board cover 108.

[3-1 e. Door frame relay board cover · handle back relay board cover · cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the back handle handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a part extending in the reverse L shape up and down) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left in front view are open. In the state assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 covering the rear side and the door frame sub relay board 105 are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle back relay board cover 108 is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the back side of the handle back relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is used. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and an opening for passing the wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction of the lower surface.

[3-1 f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is connected to the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending up and down, which are disposed apart from each other on the left and right, and the left and the right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 which has been extended, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 which is attached at the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 to the left and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart mountings on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked And the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes which are vertically separated and penetrated in the front-rear direction. In these insertion holes, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame wedge 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the width of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 in the vertical direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched in a square shape from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end. The notch portion 114 a is formed at a position where the upper plate ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b coincide with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is disposed to be separated left and right, and in a front view, has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending flatly forward from the side and a flat plate-like front piece portion connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extending portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the site of the insertion hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are stamped and formed of a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is , And assembled so as to be located below the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the ball passing opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101 and the through hole 101j. The cylinder attachment frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101 c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame and hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 mounted movably in the vertical direction on the hinge bracket 121, and a hook attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a square shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the attachment piece 121a is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The wedge member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121 b of the door frame upper hinge pin 122. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the wedge member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124 via the wedge member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121 b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121 b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out downward. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in a front view is rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 extending in the vertical direction is coaxial with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square-shaped flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The mounting piece 125 a and the protruding piece 125 b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125 b when assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is attached.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged rotatably with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the body frame lower hinge member. Can.

[3-1 i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking with The cylinder lock 130 is attached to a cylindrical cylinder main body 131 extending in the front and rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 And a rotation transmitting member 133 which rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter becomes larger toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of cutouts to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 for rotation.

  The cylinder lock 130 is in a state where the front end of the cylinder main body 131 substantially matches the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the pan unit main body 252 in the pan unit 200 when assembled in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 22 etc.).

[3-1 j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to the ball emitting device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game stored in the upper plate 201 The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by the operation of the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a which is supplied with gaming balls B from the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. And the rear end of the front cover 141 are closed and the front is opened in a box shape, and the game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front and rear direction A front cover pivotally supported on a rear cover 142 having a striking ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and an axis extending between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 in the front-rear direction. The ball extraction member 143 having a partition 143a that divides the entrance 141a from the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game ball B on the partition 143a of the ball extraction 143 one back cover 14 The ball feeding member 144 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feed solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144 A ball feed solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feed member 144, respectively.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. From 141c, an operating rod 143c of a ball pullout member 143 described later extends forward. Also, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed and guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper ball. And it is formed so that the site | part currently open | released to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from a back side.

  The ball extraction member 143 divides the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b below the inlet 141a, and has a partition 143a whose upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 144; Around an axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and being bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b from near the middle in the vertical direction and the lower end extends in the front and rear direction , A rod-like operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a lower part of the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extraction button 222 of the disc unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 is directed to the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-like plan view centering on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and the back of the blocking portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b which is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 144c which extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one gaming ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the collar portion 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 144 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 144b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 142a at the same time as the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b has a partition portion 143a. It is pivoted between the directionally oriented holding position. When the ball feed member 144 is at the supply position, the gaming ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540 and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the game ball B remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b is directed to the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b is closed at the ball feeding port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding movement rod 146 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for pivoting the ball feeding member 144 around the vertically extending axis.

  The ball feed operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable about an axially extending axis. It is done. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feed around the right end The left end side closer to the crank 147 is pivoted to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. As it is pivoted back to its initial state. As a result, the ball feed operating rod 146 causes the left end portion (tip) near the ball feed crank 147 to swing in the vertical direction by the ball feed solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and extends in the left and right direction, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b disposed on the side opposite to the side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft portion 147b And a transmission portion 147c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, whereby the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be pivoted about an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feed solenoid 140 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed unit 140 is in a state where the ball feed operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is held Turn to That is, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 144 receives one game ball B, and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 117) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the ball extracting member 143 pivotally supported pivotally or by the weight portion 143 d. However, the actuating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball extracting member 143 abuts on the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 222 of the disc unit 200. In the normal state, since the rotation is restricted, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b, and is separated. The game ball B does not intrude.

  Then, when the player presses the upper disc ball extraction button of the dish unit downward, the upper disc ball extraction slider slides downward with the operation transmission unit, and the movement lever 143c is moved with the movement of the operation transmission section downward. Will move relatively downward. When the actuating rod 143c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion, the ball extracting member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition Is released. As a result, the gaming ball B entering from the entrance 141a drops toward the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball withdrawal guiding path 241c of the unit 240 after pulling out the upper ball in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper disc ball removal slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242 b with which the operation rod 143 c of the ball removal member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B on the partition part 143 a Can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the actuating rod 143c, so that breakage of the ball pullout member 143 etc. can be prevented, and the gaming ball B is a partition It is possible to prevent bouncing back at 143a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) etc.) that is recessed forward on the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 142a of the rear cover 142. A tamperproof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated into upper and lower portions 148a at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. A lower piece portion 148b, and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered manner on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other . The upper piece portion 148 a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148 b extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 148. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove extending toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b is in communication with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 and attached to the illegal gaming ball B The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit ball) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed such that the illegal game ball B is moved into and out of the first starting opening by operating the strap The V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b after the string attached to the illegal gaming ball B is inserted between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b by It is possible to cut off by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using an illegal gaming ball B attached with a string.

[3-1 k. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed. The false cover unit 150 is attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in a rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 150 is a shallow box-like unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit main body 151 And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and a through ball passage 150a which brings the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 into communication with the upper countersink supply port of the dish unit; The full ball receiving opening 150b is open toward the rear on the lower right side in the front view of the through ball passage 150a and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 .

  In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward at the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 150b and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main frame 4 The ball ball socket 150c for receiving the game ball B (far ball) and the game ball B which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and received by the full tank ball socket 150b and the ball ball socket 150c. And a ball outlet 150d for discharging forward and communicating with the lower ball inlet of the tray unit.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receptacle 150b and the far ball receptacle 150c and the ball outlet 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of gaming balls B. A reservoir passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receptacle 150 b and the far ball receptacle 150 c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball outlet 150 d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the flat cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152; And a spring 155 for biasing the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e. The full tank detection sensor 154 detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e.

  In the far cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the gaming balls B and the gaming balls B are not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, to some extent in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the gaming balls B moves the upper end of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. As the movable piece 153 rotates, the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls B, so if fullness is detected by the full detection sensor 154, the payout of more gaming balls B is stopped At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall of that effect, and to urge the player to eliminate the filling of the lower tray 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150 a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the dispensing passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 described later of the body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f is provided to which the actuating projection 613a of 613 can abut (see FIG. 91). The door opening and closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to lower end of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full delivery passage 610b The front opening can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably inserted from the rear into the glass unit attachment portion 101 h so as to close the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 enables the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (forward) It closes the front of the area 5a.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 101h larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the inside of the glass frame 161 closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be in contact with the projection 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit attachment member 163 has a disk-like base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a bar-like projection from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 by the protrusion 163b when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163 is located below the base 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the protrusion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the backward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear face of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 170 is disposed with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear projection 172 projecting short rearwardly along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 171, and left and right And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward beyond the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed along a portion of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection 172, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projection 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area It does not prevent the game ball B from being driven into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is resiliently locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the crime prevention cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the player. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182 A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is rotatably attached by an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 It has a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 held between the base 186 and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 to return the handle 182 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 and a tip end projecting outward from the left side in a front view outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 A single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 and a single-shot button 193 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186 and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 181b radially projecting from the front end of the base 181a, and a cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three grooves 181 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102 c of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c can be inserted in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is such that the side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the portion of the handle 182 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Is slightly lower. The second protrusion 182 b is configured such that the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges outward and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 182a It also protrudes slightly high. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182 d are inclined in a substantially linear shape, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183 a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183 a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 182 e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In the present example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and has a light transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a three-dimensionally formed lens member of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (the open side). The handle unit 180 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can make the user perform the turning operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emission device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 182 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is applied with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Also, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button manipulation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, the operation before the one-shot button 193 is performed. The game ball B can be re-injected into the game area 5a by the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes, in the handle 182, four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, and the handle 182 is rotated most in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Of the first protrusion 182 a when the fourth protrusion 182 d does not rotate the handle 182 when the game ball B is most strongly hit into the game area 5 a (so-called “right hit”). The position is substantially the same as the position, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 at the position of “right-handed” in a comfortable state by changing the fourth protrusion 182 d as the first protrusion 182 a and holding the handle 182. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit from the back. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate units disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 at a position lower than the door window 101 a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper dish 201 and the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls B for hitting into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper dish 201 and the far cover unit 150 And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The pan unit 200 has a pan 201 and is mounted on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The pan unit 210 is mounted on the front of the pan base unit 210. And a rendering operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-like plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate body 212 attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 attached to the front and projecting forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the top surface of the mounting base 213; An upper counterball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper counterball removal unit 240 mounted at the rear of the upper counterball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. Tray unit main body 252, a lower plate ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decorative unit 270 separately attached to the upper front of the plate unit main body 252 A dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 mounted below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 capable of rotating operation by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by pressing operation by the player. The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 for emitting and decorating the rendering operation ring 330, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320 Vibration speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 And have.

  The whole is bulging forward as a whole, and the rendering operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 is obliquely upward forward at the center in the lateral direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper surface While the upper plate 201 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, the ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed of the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in the shape of a container which is largely expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. In the upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. See). In the upper tray 201, the entire bottom surface including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end side in a front view of the guiding passage portion 201a is below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is placed on the lower end of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper ball supply port 211a. It inclines so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thus, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The induction passage portion 201a is provided with a metal earth metal fitting 201b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game ball Static electricity charged to B can be removed.

[3-5 b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction in a front view. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the gaming balls B, and is provided at the bottom wall with a lower countersink extraction hole 202a which penetrates up and down and can discharge the gaming balls B. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202 a of the lower tray 202 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lower bowl ball extraction unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends leftward and rightward, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray 202, lower countersink holes 202a penetrating vertically are disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower ball open hole 202a. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located in front of the lower bowl ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the tray unit 200.

  The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower flat ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and open the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the above can be discharged to the lower side (e.g., dollar box) of the dish unit 200. Further, in the state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower flat ball supply port 211c, so It is possible to quickly discharge the released game ball B downward from the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5 c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front.

  The plate base unit 210 is a flat plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The mounting base 213 is attached to the right of the main body 212 and the upper pan body 212 at the upper front of the pan unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213 at the front of the pan unit base 211 And the tray unit relay board 214.

  Further, the bowl base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper bowling ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , And an after-the-counter ball removal unit 240 mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 211 at the rear of the table ball removal front unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front face of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 101 Box-shaped).

  The pan unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan ball supply port 211a and the upper pan and ball supply port 211a extending cylindrically rearward. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower circular bulb supply port 211c which penetrates back and forth in the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and cylindrically extends backward; A notch 211d is notched in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c and has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and front and rear in the front right upper side of the lower flat ball supply port 211c And an upper flat ball feed port 211e which extends upward and downward and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, and is raised on the left side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, on which the mounting base is placed. A slider insertion port 211g which penetrates back and forth in the lower part of the pan body and into which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper disc ball removal slider 242 of the upper disc ball removal unit 240 is inserted and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view Handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view And a mouth 211i.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 211 a of the bowl unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper bowl 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper bowl ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101 g is penetrated from the front side to be connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 is supplied (dispensed) into the upper tray 201 through the upper ball dispensing port 211 a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and the cylindrical rear end is the lower disc ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected with the front end of ball emission mouth 150d of far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower countersink supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball extraction guiding path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the removal of the upper ball is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower ball supply port 211c. ing. Thus, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate ball extraction button 222, the upper ball supply port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper The lower ball and ball supply port 211c is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b and the ball removal and introducing passage 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper flat ball feeding port 211 e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241 a of the rear base 241 in the upper flat ball dropping unit 240 in a state assembled to the flat base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the unit 240 after ball removal to the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the upper dish 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends in the left and right direction, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward largely from the center in the left and right in a front view. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes backward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B ing. The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper tray main body 212 is closed at the top near the right end.

  The upper tray main body 212 is attached to the lower end of the bowl unit 200 so that the portion closed at the upper side in the vicinity of the right end sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled in the tray unit 200. Further, in the upper tray main body 212, a rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the pan base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the pan unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211 f of the pan unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper side is open. The mounting base 213 is provided with an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetration port 213b penetrating vertically in the rear right corner.

  The insertion hole 213a of the mounting base 213 is a hole through which the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is removed. Moreover, the wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213 b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay substrate 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, and the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 , And relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The tray unit relay substrate 214 is attached to the right of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the back side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 Or, after inserting a prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine, or use the ball rental machine It is for deducting and returning the part of the game ball B from which the cash and prepaid card thrown in to were loaned out, or returning.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball extraction button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221 A light transmitting disc-like ball lending operation base 223 disposed to the right of the extraction button 222, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is configured of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be viewed through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball extraction button 222. Further, after inserting a prepaid card with cash or balance into the ball lending machine and pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display unit when the ball rental machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Upper flat ball removal unit and upper flat ball removal unit]
The unit 230 for removing the upper ball and the unit for removing the upper ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper flat ball extraction unit 230 and the upper flat ball extraction unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed to operate the upper tray 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower tray 202.

  The upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement projection 211 f on the front surface of the bowl unit base 211. The upper bowl ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the bowl unit base 211 at a position behind the upper bowl ball removal unit 230.

  The upper ball and ball removal front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the disk unit base 211 and extends in the up and down direction, and is movably inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 211 near the front of the upper pan and ball feed port 211 e and the slider insertion port 211 g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper flat ball extraction. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper countersink ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the disk unit base 211 so as to close the upper ball and ball supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction An upper ball ball slide slider 242 slidably mounted, a spring 243 urging the upper ball ball slide slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241; Is equipped.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is opened forward and a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. The ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received gaming ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and the game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b And a ball extraction guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and guiding it to the right in a rear view.

  The ball socket 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feed guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feed unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the gaming ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 is made to enter the entrance 141 a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241 a and the ball feeding guide path 241 b.

  The portions of the ball extraction guide path 241c that extend to the left and right are projected to the right in the rear view and inclined so that the right end in the rear view is lower than the part to which the upper disc ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached. And open on the right side in a rear view. The rear side of the ball extension guiding path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The upper part of the part extending vertically up and down below the ball feeding and guiding passage 241b is located in front of the ball pulling out port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when the ball pulling and guiding passage 241c is assembled in the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending leftward and rightward is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211 d of the lower circular bulb supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the gaming ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guiding path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

  The upper flat ball slide slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242 a that protrudes forward from the upper left corner and the operation receiving portion 242 a And an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a is formed flat. In addition, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper ball ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the front flat ball. Further, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation transmission portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates the ball extraction member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. A weir 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper countersink slider 242, and the upper countersink slider 242 is biased upward. Therefore, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

The upper counter ball removal unit 230 and the upper counter ball removal unit 240 have the upper counter ball removal slider 242 positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper counter ball removal slider 242 The upper flat screen extraction button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper flat ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmission portion 242b is blocked. The partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b to separate the two.

  Therefore, in a state in which the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b is partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball socket 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting supply port 142a to the ball emitting device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 The actuating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removal member 143 rotates the ball removal member 143 to divide the partition 143a. Is retracted from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the gaming ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receptacle 241a and the ball feed guiding path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. It will be done. The gaming ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower flat ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper plate 201 are discharged into the lower plate 202 after being discharged into the plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is released, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper pan via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 is lifted, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the actuating rod 143c in contact with the actuating transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the gaming ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5 d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 is decorating almost the whole of the dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish main body 251 and the dish unit base to cover the outer circumference of the lower dish main body 251. A bowl unit main body 252 attached to the front of the bowl 211, a lower bowl ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and a bowl separately mounted on the upper front of the bowl unit main body 252 A lower left decoration unit 280 and a lower right decoration unit mounted below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252 And 285.

[3-5 d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) which extends in the left and right direction and is open at the upper and the rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the front lower portion of the tray unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear is closed.

  The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends in the left and right direction, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray main body 251, in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view, a lower countersink hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed. The lower tray main body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the lower spherical ball opening 202a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball ball extraction lid 265 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower tray body 251 is in a state in which the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the tray unit main body 252 in a state where the lower tray main body 251 is assembled in the tray decoration unit 250. Further, the lower tray main body is in a state assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is positioned lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is a lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5 d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210, and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The pan unit body 252 bulges so that the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left and right direction bulges forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the plate unit main body 252 is curved such that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in the shape of a box opened rearward.

  The pan unit main body 252 bulges forward toward the center in the left and right direction from the left and right ends in the upper part and extends upward and separately from the upper side bulged part 252a spaced apart in the left and right And a bottom plate portion 252c extending in the form of a flat plate from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b to the rear in such a manner as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251. .

  The left and right upper side bulging parts 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and the front left plate top left decoration unit 270, the plate bottom left decoration unit 280, the plate top right decoration unit 275 and the plate bottom right decoration unit 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The pan unit main body 252 is formed with a lower pan opening 252d which penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that the player's finger can be inserted, and the lower plate opening 252d is formed to be wider upward and downward as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 is a front notch portion 252e which is notched upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is notched at a lower part of The lower countersunk ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Furthermore, the pan unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted; It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h which penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging parts 252a which becomes the center in the horizontal direction. And a rendering operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where it is assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower disc ball extraction button 263 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260 faces forward from the front notch portion 252e, and the lower disc ball extraction base 261 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5 d-3. Lower bowl ball removal unit]
The lower ball ball extraction unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and stores the game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges the game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction holes 202a. It is intended to

  The lower disc ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower disc body 251 and has a flat lower disc ball extraction base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view; A slider 262 slidably mounted to the front and back on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower countersunk ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward; The lower disc ball lid 265 opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and the holding mechanism 266 holds the lower disc ball lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262.

  The lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed to close the bottom notch 252f of the disk unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a of the lower disk 202 (lower disk main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted on the lower disc ball removal base 261 in the front and rear direction at a position from the center in the left-right direction to the left. The slider 262 is provided with a projecting pin projecting cylindrically upward.

  The lower disc ball ejection lid 265 is attached to the lower disc ball ejection base 261 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending up and down at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at the left end side. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower flat ball lid 265 is formed with a slit extending in the left and right direction in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 260, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the plate unit main body 252 in a state assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate 252c. In addition, the lower countersunk ball extraction button 263 is facing forward from the front cutout 252e of the main dish unit main body 252. Under normal conditions, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower microcontroller ball lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole in the normal state. And the through hole (the lower countersink hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265, and the gaming ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in the normal state, the front surface of the lower ball ball extraction button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  Under normal conditions, when the lower ball extraction button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower ball extraction button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower flat ball lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower flat ball lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end is backward It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower countersink hole 202a is opened, The gaming ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  In addition, when the slider 262 is moved backward by the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 is not moved forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower ball removal cover 265 is kept turned to the rear, and the lower ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the gaming balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously used. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower ball extraction hole 202a from this state, when the lower ball extraction button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pushed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. Ru. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball releasing button 263 returns to the state where it matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower ball removal cover 265 is pivoted so that the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265. Thus, the gaming balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5 d-4. Upper left decoration unit and upper right decoration unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the main unit 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are for decorating the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semicylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the back side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending to the left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the back into the dish upper left decoration 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decoration substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left decoration 271 can be made to emit light.

  The left upper part of the upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the left left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the upper central decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left decoration 271 is The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semicylindrical shape extending laterally and has a light transmitting property, the dish upper right decoration 276 and the dish upper right reflector 277 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, A dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is mounted on the back side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decoration 276 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely rightward at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from behind into the dish upper right decoration 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decoration 276 can be decorated to emit light.

  The right upper part of the upper right decoration unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the upper part decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are illuminated, the entire front face of the dish upper right decoration 276 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5 d-5. Lower left decoration unit and lower right decoration unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower portion of the front of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the main unit 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 respectively. Be The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 .

  The lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The lower left decoration 281 has a lower left reflector 282 mounted on the rear side of the lower left decoration 281. A dish lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the back side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The lower left decorative body 281 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decorative body 271 and the upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped so that the semi-cylinder is bent. The left lower end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. This dish lower left decoration 281 is formed milky white.

  The lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decoration board 283 is a full color LED, and by emitting light, the lower left decoration 281 can be made to emit light.

  With the lower left decoration unit 280 assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it looks as if the left end is sunk into the door frame 3. The lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical, horizontally extending, light transmitting dish lower right decoration 286 and a dish lower right decoration attached to the back of the dish lower right decoration 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decoration substrate 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration 286 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a of the right side. The lower right decoration 286 is a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the half cylinder is formed to be bent. The right lower end of the lower right decoration 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. This dish lower right decoration 286 is formed milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the back into the inside of the dish lower right decoration 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish lower right decoration 286 can be decorated with light emission.

  The right lower end of the lower right decoration unit 285 is located below the right end of the upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration 286 of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the dish lower right decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plural LEDs of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the dish lower right decoration 286 The entire front surface of the light emitting device can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5 e. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the pan unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the direction of movement of the effect operation button. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and while decorating the plate unit 200, the player operates and participates in the rendering when the player participation type rendering is performed. It can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. The ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation portion 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 340 A transmission gear 350 for operation ring that transmits rotation between the unit 302 and the gear 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for operation ring to the operation portion base 320.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the rendering operation ring 330, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 The decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the above, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face inside the ring of the effect operation ring 330 The rendering operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Effect operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and expanded forward, and a unit front The dish center upper reflector 313 is mounted from the rear in the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decoration substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear in the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 And a lower center decoration substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit main body 252 It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to a virtual plane formed on the front semicircular arc extending upper end edge is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drainage holes 311 a formed at the lowest position when assembled into the pan unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in which the shape of the unit front cover 312 bulges forward so that the shape in plan view follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. It is attached. The unit front cover 312 is a plate central upper decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front below the dish central upper decoration 312a. And a dish center lower decoration body 312 b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulging semicircular arc follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the dish center lower decoration 312 b.

  The plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed by dividing a cylinder of substantially the same thickness (radius) into halves and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the dividing surface facing the center side It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends with a large curvature in a semicircular arc shape with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It has a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish upper center decoration 312a protrudes forward than the front end of the dish center lower decoration 312b. Further, when assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper center decoration body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275 The left and right ends of 312 b are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the dish lower right decoration unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed milky white.

  The front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about half the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish upper central reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape which bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish central upper decoration body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper center decoration body 312a can be illuminated and decorated.

  The lower center dish reflector 315 is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower stage center decoration 312 b of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The lower center dish reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower dish center lower decoration substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b can be lighted and decorated.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of extending in a semicircular arc shape in the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, so When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower center lower decoration substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole can be emitted and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end projecting forward more than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper center decoration body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decoration body 271 and the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b is the dish lower left decoration body 281 and the dish right It is continuous with the lower decoration 286. Thus, the rendering operation unit 300 is made to stand out and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Controller base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper tray main body 212 in the dish base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having a substantially cubic outer shape and extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 whose upper portion is open, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape The upper attachment which is formed on the flange base 322, the plurality of (here four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom of the main body 321, and the rear end of the flange 322 and attached to the disc base unit 210 A portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 which is opened upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for operation ring.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into a sound such as voice or music and output it. it can.

  The leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. In the main body portion 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outer side of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outer side of the rear wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer periphery thereof substantially matches the inner periphery of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. A rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 and a decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the rendering operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for operation ring around an axis extending in the left and right direction in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is attached to the gear bearing 325, the upper portion of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring protrudes upward, and the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is a flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  The upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly lower than the upper surface of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in a state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 300. Moreover, in the state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 55, FIG. 56 and the like. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 which can be rotationally operated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) about twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

  The rendering operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and rotatably mounted around a vertically extending shaft on the ring mounting base 331 and are attached to the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotating base 332 upward And a ring retaining member 334 which regulates the movement.

  Also, the rendering operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 that constitutes a part of the rotational operation portion 302 and the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation portion 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 to constitute a part of the rotation operation portion 302 And an in-ring cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light transmitting annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the placement portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably disposed in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge and the placement portion 331a on the upper surface And a boss 331 b for projecting cylindrically upward from a plurality (four in this case) of parts and for mounting the bush 333 rotatably and spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331 a on the upper surface And a through-hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. The plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The outer diameter of the rotation base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332 a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes to the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332 a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332 a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332 a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350 a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which circular arcs forming the outer and upper portions in a circular shape are arranged three-dimensionally And an outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extending in the circumferential direction after extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335 a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc in the range of 1⁄4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335 b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335 c extends slightly lower than the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer lower portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a in the circumferential direction And a plurality of outer lower cover attachment portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336 b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc constituting an inner upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis And an inner cover attachment portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1⁄8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337 c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion in the range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 is capable of emitting light by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the left front. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for operation ring A gear cover rotatably mounting the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covering the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side 346, and.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346, and detects a rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape which is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and opened leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is constituted by a spur gear-like first gear 344a meshing with the drive gear, and a spur gear-like second gear 344b integrally rotating with the first gear 344a and having a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a having a diameter (a size twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) larger than the transmission gear 344 and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345 b have a length in the circumferential direction equal to the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345 b are arranged circumferentially at intervals of a rotational angle of 45 degrees. The detection pieces 345 b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345 b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated at a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected through the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring. Engage with Further, the whole of the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 can freely set the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 may cause the rotary operation unit 302 to oscillate in a reciprocating manner by oscillating the drive gear 343 by means of the operation ring drive motor 342 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  In the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345 b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be given to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by combining these as appropriate, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The transmission gear 350 for operation ring of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 340, and the gear of the operation portion base 320 It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The transmission gear 350 for operation ring rotates integrally with the ring gear portion 350a in the bevel gear shape engaged with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340 And a spur gear-like drive-side gear portion 350b engaged with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The pitch circle of the ring gear portion 350a and the drive gear portion 350b are formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-like ring side gear portion 350 a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340. The transmission gear 350 for operation ring is inserted from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320, so that it is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320. Be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Effect operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can emit light and decorate the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annular ring is divided back and forth, and is configured of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arrayed along the outer circumference on each of the top surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. Similar to the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the decoration substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear, and is a front substrate cover that covers the front decoration substrate 352a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 A rear substrate cover 353 b and a rear substrate cover 353 b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 from the upper side covering the rear decorative substrate 352 b are configured.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and thereby the rotation operation unit 302 is configured through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331 c of the ring attachment base 331. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the light emission decoration that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and can output various frequencies of vibration in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared to a vibration device in which a decentered weight is rotated by a motor, and can present more colorful effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The rendering operation button unit 360 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 which can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is configured of a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has an outer periphery formed in a substantially circular shape, and is disposed at an object bordering on a central axis of the button unit base 361 attached within the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the button unit base 361. A disc-like member having a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having a circular outer periphery smaller than the button unit base 361 Between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, the guide shaft 362 is movably attached in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disc-shaped lifting and lowering base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the presentation operation button unit 360 extends cylindrically upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has a central shaft 366 whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363 and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361 Engaging with the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361 and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably inserted by the central shaft 366 being inserted therein. 370, the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected and the central shaft A lift cam member 371 for vertically moving the lift base 364 by inserting and rotatably attaching and moving the lift base 364, the lift drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lift cam drive gear member 370 is covered from above. And a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose inner diameter is larger than the upper base and extends vertically, and is mounted movably in the vertical direction by the pair of guide shafts 362 above the lift base 364 Substantially the same as the central button main body 373 and a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the elevation base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward; The central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter and the upper end side is closed and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing portion 303a.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button main body 373 on the upper surface of the elevation base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted; An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative substrate 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and raised and lowered so as to cover the outer peripheral surface and upper surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having translucency with three-dimensional decoration A transparent perimeter button attached to the base 364 with the center button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is configured by the outer periphery substrate cover 378, the outer periphery decoration lens 379, and the outer periphery button cover 380.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and the elevation cam driving gear member 370. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting a rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base main body 361 a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361 b projecting downward from the base main body 361 a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed in a size slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The lower end of the leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached on the top surface of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361 a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter that is about one half of the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevation base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The lift base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a in which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrated with a size that allows the lift cam member 371 to pass through at the center. An upright wall portion 364c cylindrically projecting upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axial core and rotatably mounted around the axial core.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The upper end of the upright wall 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict the upward movement of the elevating base 364 and a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364c. It is formed. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The lift cam drive gear member 370 has a spur gear-like gear portion 370a engaged with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b projecting upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the lift cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. The elevating detection piece 370 c has two cylindrical portions projecting downward from the lower side and facing each other, which are notched and detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The lift cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by the central shaft 366 being inserted at the center. The lift cam member 371 is spaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface, and includes a pair of cam portions 371a protruding outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevation base 364.

  The cam portion 371a has a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end parallel to the axial center, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364 d of the lift base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371 a.

  Further, the lift cam member 371 is provided at the lower end thereof with a connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the lift cam drive gear member 370.

  The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the lift cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as. The raising and lowering cam member 371 can rotate and thereby guide the guide pin 364d of the raising and lowering base 364 by the cam portion 371a to raise and lower the raising and lowering base 364.

  The central button body 373 penetrates the cylindrical portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b, and the pair of guide shafts A pair of guide holes 373c into which the guide 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevation base 364 and downward from the bottom 373b It includes a pressing detection piece 373 e which is projected and detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373 f which project in a cylindrical shape rearward from the bottom portion 373 b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the cylindrical portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom 373 b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373 d is formed in a cylindrical shape which is extended short downward, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the lift base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button main body 373 is restricted. Through the central opening 373 d of the central button body 373, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f is inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f is formed such that the lower end extends downward through the lift base 364 and a screw having a washer inserted therein is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts the lower surface of the lift base 364 to restrict the upward movement of the central button body 373.

  When the bottom portion 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the elevation base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 It is formed to project downward through 364. The central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevation springs 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to be translucent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

  The central button decoration substrate 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface as full color LEDs. The center button decoration substrate 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 can cause the outer circumference decoration lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and has an annular base portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and cylindrically extending upward from the inner periphery of the base portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378 b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as going upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending to the center side from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the effect operation button unit 360, in the assembled state, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is in a state where the elevation base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevation springs 365, The locking portion 371 c of the cam portion 371 a of the lift cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 Also project upward (see FIG. 63 etc.).

  In this state (the state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373 e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303 a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven through the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. While rolling to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in one cam 371b, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relative to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 causes the guide pin 364d to move upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to be in the raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in the state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 moves upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected to a position larger than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 when moved to the raised position in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300 (see FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes in contact with the lift base 364. In a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevation base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the central button main body 373 protrudes downward relative to the elevation base 364, but the elevation base 364 is a button unit base 361. Because the pressure detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevation spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and along with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button main body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button main body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 However, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressure on the center button cover 375 (center pressure operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force more than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 lifts the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380 The lower end of the lifting base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevation base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) protrudes upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body The pressing detection piece 373 e does not protrude downward from the elevation base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer periphery button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising and lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button raising and lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 is moved downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d becomes the first cam Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 364d into the locking portion 371c which is recessed upward, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay substrate unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay substrate 392 attached inside the substrate box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay substrate 392 is a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a presentation operation ring decoration board 352, a vibration speaker Relay the connection between the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the pressure detection sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in the plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing section It is a front view of a saucer unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player on the top surface. The effect operation unit 301 is configured of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a circular center pressing operation unit 303 a positioned at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer periphery pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And 303 b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303 a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b is formed by the outer periphery button cover 380 and the outer periphery substrate cover 378.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operating unit 302 (the rendering operation ring 330) is lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward) .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Figure 63 etc.)

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates clockwise in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can repeat the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a range of a predetermined rotation angle to swing the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth to vibrate. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in left side view through the transmission gear 350 for operation ring, and the rotation is performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors of a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345 b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 spaced apart in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The intervals are not integer multiples. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. Do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. The rotational speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342. . Alternatively, by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavier or to give a click feeling.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more circular arc extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And since the rotation operation part 302 is attached in the state which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of inner peripheral surface exposed, as shown in figure, it is formed in the shape which is easy to grasp with a player's hand .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that the player can easily do, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 Sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the rotation operation part 302 is attached to the operation part base 320 on the lower surface side, it can not be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the rendering operation unit 300 is provided below the rendering operation ring 330 with a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged. Thus, the light emitting decoration of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be performed by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to emit light and decorate only a specific part of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, the player can be illusive as if the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descent position which projected slightly upwards. In this state, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303 a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). The sensor 381 detects a press.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) is not moved downward, and the pressing is detected The sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  In the normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b) The biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the pressing base 303 along with the lifting base 364 to vigorously project upward to be in the state of the rising position (see FIG. 65B). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the center pressing unit 303a is pressed downward with the pressing unit 303 in the raised position, first, the center pressing unit 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374 to move the center pressing unit 303a. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b are the rotation operating unit 302. The height is substantially the same as that of the upper surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects a press.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 presses the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b downward with the pressing operation unit 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a is projected above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b. The outer periphery pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing unit 303b becomes substantially flush with the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65A). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment can not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operating unit 301 in the player participation type effect , The player participation type can be more enjoyable.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotating operation may be facilitated by the pressing operation unit 303, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be difficult to perform the rotating operation. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more versatile operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 66 to FIG. Fig.66 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the front of the door frame left side base 401 A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape which extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip plate shape extending vertically, and is configured of a left side upper decorative substrate 402 a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402 b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can cause the door frame left-side decoration 404 to emit light and decorate by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate.

  The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the form which the half circular arc bulging forward extended up and down. Thus, the door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453 It is formed to be continuous with the lower end on the left side of.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and appears as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends from the right side of the door frame 3 in the form of a flat plate to the front substantially to the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left and right direction And a light emitting side window interior decoration 410b disposed in a plurality in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 is a player who makes it difficult to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right in the gaming hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 inconspicuous, and to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward cylindrically and arranged in a row vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the plurality of side window in-window decorative members 412 And an internal reflector 414 which is inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration 410b.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed to the front of the front end of the side window inner decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the door frame A door extending in a plate shape in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and having a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction to constitute a side window 410a It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 Door frame having a through-hole 417a which extends in the shape of a circle and which penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the right side reflector 415 And a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and being opened rearward. The in-side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a connecting the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) in-side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window inner decoration portion 410b of the side window inner decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-like cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed hemispherical ing. In the side window inner decoration member 412, the front end of the side window inner decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower side position to the upper side with respect to the vertical center. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed to have a translucent white light.

  The side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 is attached to the front of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape of upper, lower, left, and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is done.

  The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The inner reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window inner decoration portion 410b into four in the upper, lower, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wave shape such that it moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates in the front and rear direction, and a plurality of through holes 415 a are formed in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, a through hole 417a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip-like plate shape, and is configured of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration 419 to emit light and decorate by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavelike manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 It is formed to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends in a wavelike manner forward so that a quarter of the portion from the top protrudes forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and can visually recognize the opposite side through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window inner decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LEDs of the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window interior decoration 410b can be illuminated and decorated. Then, the light emission decoration is performed on the side window inner decoration portion 410b, so that the inside of the side window 410a can be made bright and the opposite side can be made less visible through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, since the LED of the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decorative portions 410b is turned off in the normal state, the side window It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if the player who is searching for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the other part including the in-side window decorative part 410b. It is possible to make the whole game area 5a hard to see from the player, and by making it hard to receive the feeling as seen from other players, it is possible to cause the other players to play the game without hesitation .

  Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a glare, and the visibility through the side window 410a changes Let At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial manner, so the side window inner decoration portions 410b are made to be dazzling and the opposite side is made between them It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a from another player such as the next player. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to avoid that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the other player is distracted by being noticed. Can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable because you can not concentrate on playing games, or you can feel you are lost due to the induction of mistakes, and you can make the game more fun by letting the player concentrate on playing games It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is an outside of the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451 attached on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451 And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the frame.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted A door frame top right decoration substrate 457 attached to the right of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front Have.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top decoration Between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front of the top top cover 452.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached respectively to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 from below And a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from the lower side, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near upper right end of base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-like main body portion 451a extending in the right and left in the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction; And a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451 a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined in such a way as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in the shape of a box opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451 b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most projecting forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward as going from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front on the upper surface. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a curvature which becomes smaller as going from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 It is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the lateral direction bulges upward Extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape such that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically separated between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a which are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically in the lateral direction outer side of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464 ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front as full color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can emit light and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 to emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs appropriately.

  The top central reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes are formed at the positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending leftward and rightward, and is mounted such that the pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and frontward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

  The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, and the front end thereof is locked to the top upper cover 452 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and the outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419 to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As illustrated, the door frame 3 has, at the center in a front view, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish unit 200, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame The outer periphery of the door window 101 a is surrounded by the door frame 101 a by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Top left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, top right decorative body 276, top center decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body Since the reference numeral 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish upper center decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame 101 Behind the door frame top decoration 453, the dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration board 278, dish upper center decoration board 314, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top central decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate appropriately. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is coaxially disposed on the upper surface in an annular annular donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and the rotation operating unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. Of the upper and lower two-centered upper decoration 322a and the lower center decoration 312b of a large diameter donut shape (semi-cylindrical shape or semi-tubular shape), The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration of the plate 312b, the door frame right side unit 41 Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically aligned with the rotation operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center decoration 3a and 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery Since the pressing operation unit 303 b and the center pressing operation unit 303 a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish lower left decoration 281 disposed below the dish upper center decoration 312a, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish lower center decoration 312b, The tube-like tube has a slightly smaller thickness, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the lower center dish decoration 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 is larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation portion 302 or the like operable by the player disposed on the upper side. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the tray unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, so that the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is performed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to appeal the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open as shown in the figure, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Can be mounted.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion is insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. Body frame upper hinge member 510 to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted and the body frame mounted on the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2; Body frame lower hinge set attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500 A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the front side upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 mounted on the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 Back cover 640 which is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connecting cable guide member for guiding a connecting frame 503 for connecting the main body frame base 501 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose shape in front view extends vertically and a door frame 3 side. And 502 a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-like ball tank attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the form of a groove opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  Payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 for guiding gaming balls B from tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, and one for gaming balls B induced by ball guidance unit 570 based on instructions from payout control board 633. Dispensing device 580 each, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B passed through the dispensing device 580 downward, the gaming ball B through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the back surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the back side of the base unit 620b. 620 c, a payout control unit 620 d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620 c, and an interface unit 620 e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620 a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a plurality of door frame wedges 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame ridge 652 or the outer frame ridge 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame ridge 652 downward. A lock spring 655 which biases and presses the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 which moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Main unit frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guiding member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front to the rear, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide the connecting cable 503 And a game board lock member 505 rotatably mounted on a lower portion of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 in an attachable and detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion slot 501b which penetrates back and forth in the height range of the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b is formed, and the game board on which the game board 5 is placed A placement board 501c, and a game board regulation part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left and right and backward.

  Further, the main frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front of the base main body 501a in the front view, and the launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540; It penetrates back and forth in the cylinder insertion port 501f which penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the part 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth in the front view lower left side of the game board placement part 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward under the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. The cable attachment recess 501 h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached and the positive of the cable attachment recess 501 h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the front right side of the gaming board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 640 is at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the rear extension portion 501j rotatably mounted and the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, and for mounting the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably mounted on the main body frame base 501 at a position below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b, thereby making the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b removable.

  The cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is attached to the right of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501 h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 protrudes forward in the upper and lower sides of a flat guide body 502a extending in the left and right direction, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are extended, a cylindrical attachment shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right ends of the guide main body 502a And a plurality of through holes 502d aligned in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501 h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 etc., the connection cable guiding member 502 is an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 by the connection cable guide member. In a state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide main body 502a so as to extend leftward from the right side of the guide main body 502a of 502, the lateral direction is the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being clamped together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 which penetrated to the pair of through-holes 502d of the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 in a state where the assembly door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and the door frame relay board cover It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed to the left of the left end of the connection cable guiding member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the open angle α of the door frame 3 and the open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies: α / 2 ≧ β (desirably, α / 3 ≧ β) (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guiding member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α becomes larger, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees) Transition as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward relative to the main body frame base 501. The guiding of the connection cable 503 can prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 is relatively moved backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guiding member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the side of the door frame 3, the cable holder 103a is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guiding member 502, and the door rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 centering on the central axes (axial centers) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126. A tangent line contacting a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) projecting backward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and an angle of 45 degrees crossing the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is configured to be as follows. Thereby, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the tip end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened through the connection cable 503. Since it is possible to press in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 which rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Main frame upper hinge member]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  An upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511 And a main frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically in the front view left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 at a horizontally extending portion, and the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 Have.

  A portion of the upper hinge main body 511 which is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501 k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted in the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 can be mounted so that the main frame 4 can be hinged rotatably relative to the outer frame 2 in cooperation with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520, and the door frame relative to the main frame 4 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape upward And a lower hinge second body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate material extending horizontally is bent in an L shape upward. The lower horizontal hinge assembly 520 is provided with a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 at a distance from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower portion thereof. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below for the outer frame It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a at the left side of the horizontally extending portion, for restricting the pivoting range of the door frame 3; And. The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 5011 of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. Be The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the main frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main frame 4. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 81, FIG. 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The cross-sectional shape in plan view of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed in a U shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion material.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted forward and upward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position control members 531 are vertically spaced apart and attached.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door unit 3 is attached to the main unit 4 It is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can strike the gaming ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 541 in a front view From around the tip of the hitting ball 543, a shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose axis extends forward through the shooting base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and The game ball B is mounted on the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward and to the left, and the game ball B is rollable.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feed unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544 When the handle 182 is turned in the state where it is in motion, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hit ball 543. The game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rails 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) Between the two, it falls to the ball socket 150 c of the lower far cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the far cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Disbursement base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. Fig. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as viewed from the rear. Dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of main body frame base unit 500.

  The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side in front view of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as that of the top plate portion 551a and is shortened short, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b Back plate left portion 551e and inner plate portion 551f extending backward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left side plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left side plate portion 551b to the right Extend to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and in an L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the lateral direction substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the game board slot 501b of the main frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is the upper and lower sides of the game board slot 501b It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the direction height. The front end of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c of the dispensing base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion which is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the portion is dispensed Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner side plate portion 551 f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551 i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  Dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of top plate portion 551a of dispensing base 551 and extends in the left and right box-like ball tank 552 opened upward, and the portion of dispensing base 551 extending in the left and right And a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 at the upper side and extending in the form of a groove opened upward to the left.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 on the left side of the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction, A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553 and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 And a ball stopper 557 attached near the left end in the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left and right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left and right direction, and the front and rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front and rear direction Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached on the upper surface of the top plate 551 a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the top surface of the top plate 551 a of the dispensing base 551 with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is approximately one minute from the depth at which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonal to the left and back from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 and several times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B After extending so as to be depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left at a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guiding passage 570 a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the left end. It inclines so that the left end side becomes low at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. In addition, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the tank rail 553 at the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from spreading or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to the axis about which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction It is rotatably mounted. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in two stages in the upper and lower directions is delayed by the rectifying pieces 556a, and the flow is rectified in the downstream side to flow in the tank rail 553 Even if the height is lowered, it does not clog the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is mounted slidably in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 in the front view, and by sliding left, the bottom end opening of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from circulating from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  Furthermore, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the top surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the payout unit]
The entire configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear is there. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the gaming ball B disposed under the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570 A payout device 580 for paying out one at a time based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B having passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned by the tank rails 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pullout passage 580b is operated from the ball pulling lever 593 to the upper full ball passage unit The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the gaming ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the gaming ball B discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, receives the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 and guides the gaming ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is to do.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-like guiding unit base 571 having a meanderingly extending guiding passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is opened forward, and a front side of the guiding unit base 571 closed. The game ball B in the guide passage 570a is detected by detecting the movement of the flat guide channel front lid 572 and the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a. And a ball-off detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front cover 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The induction passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the induction unit base 571 and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the induction unit base 571 and then bends to the right It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

  The guiding passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front and rear right and the width in the right and left direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the gaming ball B is distributed. It can be guided in one row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the movable piece member 573 is mounted to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a near the top. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side in a front view of the guide passage 570a, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to be. In this movable piece member 573, when the gaming ball B is in contact with the portion projecting into the guiding passage 570a, the projecting portion is pushed by the gaming ball B and does not protrude backward from the inside of the guiding passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guiding passage 570a, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from inside the guiding passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the gaming ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non detection state when the gaming ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is a dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It is in communication with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B extends in a serpentine manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many gaming can be performed in the guiding passage 570a. The ball B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90 (a) is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extraction movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a) It is. Dispensing device 580 is removably attached to the underside of ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of back plate left portion 551e of dispensing base 551 of dispensing base unit 550 from the rear.

  The payout device 580 has a box-like opening in the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can be distributed and a payout device main body 581 having a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a It has a flat-plate-like dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-like dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, and the rotating shaft is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583; The second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 and the second transmission gear 587 Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a plurality of detection pieces 588 b extending outward from the spur gear-like dispensing gear 588 a and the dispensing gear 588 a A plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the discharge gear member 588 between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device back cover 582 and have a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the discharge passage 580a are provided. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the discharge device main body 581 and detecting a detection piece 588b of the discharge gear member 588.

  Furthermore, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects the gaming ball B, and after the payout device main body 581 and the payout device The ball extraction movable piece 592 mounted so as to be able to open and close the ball extraction passage 580b at a site branched from the ejection passage 580a by the lid 582 and the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be held at the position where the ball extraction passage 580b is closed. And a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a plan view. The dispensing device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger in the front view right than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position near the left from the center in the lateral direction, and the downstream end is at a position near the right end in the lateral direction. It opens downward. Dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height from the upper end so as to move little by little leftward, and after bending slightly diagonally downward from the upper side, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589. Then, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B above the center of the dispensing blade 589, a gap slightly larger than the gaming ball B with the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 It extends downward in a circular arc concentric with the discharge blade 589 so as to be formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right of the rear view from the center of the discharge blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches off at a portion bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side in a rear view to the lower end in the rear view of the bottom surface It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball B A main body side guide wall 581a which protrudes backward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap than the other, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall in back view of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removing passage 580b And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and are a back view of a portion extending to the right in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the dispensing device body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in a rear view. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588 b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device back cover 582. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending in the dispensing passage 580a from the upper side to the rotational axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. And protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc having a radius larger than the radius of the gaming ball B to the center side, between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can regulate movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. Thus, the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially integrally rotatably mounted by the dispensing device rear lid 582 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left in the rear view of the rotation shaft of the delivery gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the discharge gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the discharge blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces in the dispensing passage 580a. The depth of the ball removal movable piece 592 is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a Through the gap between the two, and may be projected into the ball removal passage 580b or retracted out of the ball removal passage 580b.

  The ball extracting lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear view left in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball extracting movable piece 592. A part of the ball extraction lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lowering end, the lower portion can be in contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580 b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. See 90).

  When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the gaming ball B, which is in a state like beading on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, is the ball pulling movable piece 592. Flow to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early.

  As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is to be emitted downward from the payout device 580 and guide the gaming ball B to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-like upper full tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side open. And a dispenser pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the top full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispenser 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601 a for attaching a back cover.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 600 is an upper discharge that opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side to a position about 2/3 the height from the lower side. It is in communication with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper discharging ball receiving passage 600a and extends about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the full height An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper normal discharge passage 600c An upper full tank delivery passage 600d extending downward from the front right side from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the upper surface And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank passage unit 600, the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left in front view. The upper full ball passage unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the gaming ball B released (disbursed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b to form the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. It is discharged downward from any of the The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate 551g of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball channel unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full-tan ball passage unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank passage unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. And a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward at the front end of the lower full tank base 611, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 which can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end opening of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b And a closing spring 614 which is biased.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b extend forward in a side-by-side manner, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. The lower full tank delivery passage 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal delivery passage 610a. The lower ball removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the longitudinal direction.

  The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream end) of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. Opening is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613 a protruding forward. The actuating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and as the front end face approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction It is inclined to project forward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a is formed to abut on the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the wafer cover unit 150 in the door frame 3.

  In the lower full tank unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are opened upward at the rear upper end, are assembled into the upper full at the upper end of the lower unit. It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue passage unit 600. Thereby, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is the lower full payout passage 610b. , And the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball-opening passage 600e flow in the lower ball-opening passage 610c.

  Further, when the lower full-tank passage unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal delivery passage 610 a and the lower full delivery passage 610 b pass through the fal cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is opened immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receptacle 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610 c is opened to face the ball removal guiding portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in the normal state (the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the actuating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing of the fal cover unit 150. By being in contact with the portion 150f, the plate is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. Thus, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are opened, and are communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving hole 150b of the far cover unit 150. It is in the state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the fall cover unit 150. Is pivoted in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the gaming balls B in the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b can not move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7 e. Flow of gaming balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the gaming balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lowering end, and the ball pulling passage 580 b branched from the discharging passage 580 a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

  A predetermined number of ball tanks 552, which are open upwards, are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example. A game ball B is supplied. The gaming balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 through the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 in a state of being aligned by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the gaming ball B can not move (flow downward) downstream of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of gaming balls B stagnate upstream of the payout blade 589 It becomes.

  Then, the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball breakage detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the gaming ball B is stored in the passage from at least the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the dispensing blade 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the dispensing motor 584, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a It is released downstream of 589. Then, the gaming balls B discharged from the dispensing blade 589 (the ball accommodating portion 589 b) are sent to the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600 after being detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591.

  The gaming ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passing unit 600 is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. Then, the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600 c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate-ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 in the case of FIG.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 becomes full with the game balls B, the game balls B can not be released forward from the upper ball feed opening 211a, so the payout device When the game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal discharge passage 610a of the lower full tank passage unit 610 and the game ball B is further discharged, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the communicating upper full ball passage unit 600. Then, when the gaming ball B is further dispensed in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the gaming balls B, the upper normal ball storage passage 600b communicated on the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is stored. The gaming ball B starts to stagnate, and the gaming ball B begins to flow down to the upper full payout path 600d side adjacent to the upper normal payout path 600c.

  Then, the gaming ball B that has flowed down to the upper full discharge passage 600 d passes through the lower full discharge passage 610 b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and fills the full ball receptacle 150 b in the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Received by Thereafter, the gaming balls B received in the full tank receptacle 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. As a result, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The gaming ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full with gaming balls B (( The player is informed that the container is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected.

  When discharging the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descent end Slide it to the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a , And is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, in the region of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581 a and the rear lid side guide wall 582 a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592. Is less likely to break.

  The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, the ball ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 pass through the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged to the island facilities side of

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the bottom rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The base unit 620 is a main unit frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side than the game board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main unit frame base 501 in the main unit frame base unit 500. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the front end of the speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501. And a container-like speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view and extending in the vertical direction, and a front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a A space front recess 621b recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side and a space protruding downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extending in the lateral direction and directed diagonally backward And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 . The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container opened forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most greatly, and is stepped backward in a step-like manner toward the right in front view. It is formed so that the protrusion of. As a result, a space on the rear side to the right of the center in the front view of the speaker box 623 can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620 b, the power supply unit 620 c, and the like can be disposed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621 c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has the space front concave portion 621b which bulges forward in the front view right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the enclosure 624 protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 goes to the right The space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is secured sufficiently wide even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount.

  In the speaker unit 620 a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48. And the inner space 40a of the outer plate 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a large space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622 The sound that has been output can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space (a part of the enclosure 624) behind the main body frame speaker 622 is extended to the right in front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made with the outer frame lower assembly 40 through the connection tube portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound outputted from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. The sound can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted low frequency band can be resonated and amplified by passing the two port members 47 and can be emitted forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-reversed state, and therefore, it is outputted from the front of the main frame speaker 622 to be a dish unit The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the aperture of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which heavy bass sounds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass. Thus, a sound emitted from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211 b of the dish unit 200 and a sound emitted from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through cylinder 623a which extends in a cylindrical shape and communicates with the through hole 621d is formed. In the assembled state of the speaker unit 620 a, the through hole 621 d and the through cylinder 623 a communicate with each other, and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620 b of the board unit 620 is attached to the front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620 c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 guiding rightward and a discharge ball receiving portion receiving the gaming ball B which is opened upward on the right side in a front view on the downstream side of the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and which is discharged downward from the game board 5 628, and a ball outlet 629 for discharging the gaming ball B which has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharging ball receiver 628 downward.

  The upstream end of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 is opened leftward in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and the downstream end is opened on the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610 The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends in the left and right direction. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 at the left end in a front view, and is inclined so as to be lower toward the right side.

  The base unit 620b guides the game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, Since the sheet is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, the space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction can be easily secured widely in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be enlarged, and the player can hear sounds with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

  The power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 includes a power supply substrate 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply substrate cover attached to the rear base 626 to cover the rear side of the power supply substrate 630. And 631.

  The dispensing control unit 620d includes a box-like dispensing control substrate box 632 detachably mounted on the rear side of the power supply substrate cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control substrate 633 housed in the dispensing control substrate box 632 (see FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 according to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Then, the game balls B of the instructed number are to be paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The dispensing control board box 632 is formed to leave a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhances the deterrence against fraud.

  The interface unit 620 e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620 a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. And an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to the rearmost portion of the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 on the rear surface of the speaker box 623. The interface board 635 is connected to an end of one (the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface substrate 635 is connected to a power supply substrate 630, a payout control substrate 633, a main control substrate, a peripheral control substrate, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface substrate cover 636 extends to the right in a front view more than the substrate base 634 (interface substrate 635) so as to cover a part of the dispensing control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion slot 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the rear extension of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 on the right side in a front view, and the left side is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the back plate upper portion 551 d in the assembled state. It is formed to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating vertically and longitudinally. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 projecting forward from the unit base 651. A door frame wedge 652, a plurality of outer frame wedges 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and forward projecting from the lower end of the front end of the unit base 651 And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 biases the door frame collar 652 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward as compared to the lock spring 655 and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. And an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame collar 653 downward by protruding forward from the upper position and sliding it downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame ridges 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward of the front surface of the main frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, whereby the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The transmission member 133 is engaged, and rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame wedges 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) The frame collar 653 is locked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, inserts a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130, and when rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, a plurality of transmission cylinders 654 The door frame wedge 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame collars 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame wedges 653 move downward, and the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip end sides of the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The entire configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is a front view showing the inside of the game area where game balls in the game board circulate. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. General winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B in the game area 5a, first start opening 2002, gate section 2003, a second start opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second opening win 2006 are provided (see FIG. 100). Therefore, the game board 5 has the game ball B in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning combination in the gaming area 5a. It is for playing a game in which the hitting operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed through the mouth 2006 and the like.

  The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 100) in a part of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is to be in the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97 and 117 etc.) for controlling the content.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player's side so as to be visible to the player in the upper left corner of the front component 1000; The peripheral control unit (not shown) disposed behind 1100, the effect display device 1600 disposed in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100 It further comprises a front unit 2000 attached to the front, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B inserted into the gaming area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B; The second start opening 2004 and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 can receive the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003. A first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006, which allow the reception of the game ball B in any one of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the reception of the game ball B, The Eteiru.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning hole 2001. A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the starting opening unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and vertically middle at the right end in the front view of the gaming area 5a And a gate unit 2300 having a gate portion 2003 attached to the lower side, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 attached at the center of the game area 5a in a front view. A frame-shaped center character 2500 having a first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is a box shape attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and open at the front, and is a square opening closed by the effect display device 1600 being removably attached from the back side to the back wall. And a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300 mounted in the back box.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 99 and 100. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and abuts against the game ball B rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. The gaming ball B induced to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (the game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear projection 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. This notch 1010 matches the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch and the lower full tank path The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
The gaming panel 1100 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) to be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is done. In the present embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  Although not shown, the panel board 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and has an out recess 1111 recessed downward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. In addition, a plurality of opening portions for attaching the front unit 2000 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back.

  The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder has a through hole which holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and which penetrates in the front and back direction with an inside of approximately the same size as the game area 5a. ing.

  Moreover, the panel holder is provided with the notch part notched upward from the lower end in a front view lower left corner. This notch portion is formed to coincide with the notch portion 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated and the lower full ball path is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 which is notched rearward from the front end at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state to the game board 5 and A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  With the substrate holder 1200 assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface It can be made to discharge from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 117) for controlling the game contents and payout of the game ball B, and the main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the substrate holder 1200. And have.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second start port sensor 2511, a first count sensor 2512, a second count sensor 2513, a specific area sensor 2512a, a start port solenoid 2514, a first attacker solenoid. 2515, a second attachment solenoid 2516, a distribution solenoid 2111, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 99 and FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  In the function display unit 1400, the detailed illustration omits the shin, and displays a state display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming state, and two normal lottery results for drawing by passing the game ball B against the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display made of LEDs, and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are provided.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations (the number of first reservations) pertaining to the acceptance of gaming ball B, and drawing by the acceptance of gaming ball B to the second start port 2004 From the second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the second special lottery results, and from the two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations (second number of reservations) pertaining to the reception of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 And a second special hold number indicator.

  Furthermore, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the number of times of opening and closing patterns of at least one of the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 Equipped with a round indicator, which consists of five LEDs to display the number of rounds.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit controls a presentation to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box (not shown) accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. And. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control substrate 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative substrates on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can visually recognize from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 99 and 100. The front unit 2000 is attached from the front to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is the opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B The second start-up port 2004 where the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, and the first start-up port 2002 or the second start-up port 2004 The first special winning opening 2005 and the second big winning allowing the reception of the game ball B in at least one according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B It is provided with a 2006, a.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the lateral center of the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed near the lower end in the vertical direction near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. Directly below the gate unit 2003, the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a height slightly below the left of the gate portion 2003 and slightly below the right general winning port 2001. The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed at a height slightly below the second starting opening 2004 and slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002. The second large winning opening 2006 is disposed slightly lower on the left side of the first large winning opening 2005.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1008 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has one start winning port 2001 and one first start port 2002, and a start port A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and with respect to the center in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a A gate unit 2300 attached to the lower side and having a gate part 2003, and attached to the center of the game area 5a slightly above the center in a front view, and one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, Closed the frame of the center character 2500 and the center character 2500 having the first big prize port 2005 and the second big prize port 2006 Includes a transparent front direction unit 2600 is attached to so that the.

  The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate unit 2003 formed such that one game ball B can always pass in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003.

  In front unit 2000, gaming ball B accepted in general winning opening 2001 is sent to back unit 3000 on the rear side of gaming panel 1100 and detected by general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to lower substrate holder 1200. Exhausted. In addition, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Be done.

  In addition, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2511 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2005 is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a when being distributed to a specific area by the distribution member described later, and then detected by the first count sensor 2512 and discharged by the distribution member When it is distributed to the area, it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 without being detected by the specific area sensor 2512 a, and then it is sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. In addition, the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second count sensor 2513 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8a. Center feature]
The center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 101 is a front view of the center role and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 5 a in a front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. 3300 can be viewed from the front. In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B inserted into the game area 5a is within the frame It can not intrude into

  The center character 2500 has one general winning opening 2001 disposed at the lower right corner in a front view on the outer periphery of the frame, a second starting opening 2004 slightly below the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening 2004 The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed below the second starting opening 2004, and the second large winning opening 2006 is disposed slightly below the first large winning opening 2005. In addition, the center character 2500 is capable of releasing the game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2501 and the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open for entry on the outer peripheral surface on the left in front view. And a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center character 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is In the state of being attached to 1110), the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed to be lowest. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowermost portion in the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the gaming ball B can be released into the gaming area 5a from this portion. In the center product 2500, the height of the lowest part of the stage 2503 is substantially the same height as the second starting opening 2004.

  The center portion 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the high portion (top) of the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the gaming ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  In addition, the center role 2500 has a second start opening sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received by the second start opening 2004 and a first count that detects the game ball B received by the first big winning opening 2005. A sensor 2512, a specific area sensor 2512a that detects the game ball B received by the first large winning opening 2005 and distributed to a specific area by the distributing member, and the game ball B received by the second large winning opening 2006 And a second count sensor 2513 for detecting (see FIG. 117). In addition, the center role 2500 has a starting opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the normal drawing drawn by passing the gaming ball B of the gate unit 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting First Attacker Solenoid 2515 which opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the mouth 2004, and the first starting opening 2002 or the first The second attack solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the first special drawing result or second special drawing result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004, and the first large winning opening A distribution solenoid 2111 is provided which operates a distribution member that distributes the game ball winning a prize in 2005 into a specific area and a discharge area.

  The center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the right side from the center in the left and right direction of the upper surface in the front view and the upper portion of the right side are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. Between the two, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed. In addition, when the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the front lower right corner has the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 arranged. The portion at the lower right corner in the front view extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and forms a space between the portion at the lower right corner and the upper portion at the right side. The gate unit 2300 is disposed in the space.

  Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so that the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball B can pass through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. While being able to do, it is possible to make the game ball B receive to the 1st large winning a prize mouth 2005 which is opened with high probability (is open) and the 2nd large winning a prize mouth 2006.

[5-8b. Table production unit]
The table rendering unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105 and the like. FIG. 102 is a side sectional view as seen from the right of the table effect unit along with the center character, cut at the center in the left-right direction. FIG. 103: is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a surface production unit, and the reflective recessed part of a front light guide plate. FIG. 104 is a front view showing a light emission mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is made to emit light.

  The table rendering unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the frame-shaped center character 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center character 2500. The table rendering unit 2600 is mounted on the upper surface of the reflector 2620 and the transparent flat surface light guide plate 2610 which closes the inside of the frame of the center character 2500, the reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the surface light guide plate 2610 A front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 for emitting light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, a front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and a reflector 2620 are covered with a center feature And a front cover 2650 attached to the 2500.

  The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed on the transparent flat light guide plate main body 2611 and the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 from any of the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide main body 2611 And a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2613 for reflecting incident light forward. The plurality of specific light entrance sections 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 includes four of the first specific light entrance section 2612a, the second specific light entrance section 2612b, the third specific light entrance section 2612c, and the fourth specific light entrance section 2612d. It is configured. The first specified light receiving portion 2612 a, the second specified light receiving portion 2612 b, the third specified light receiving portion 2612 c, and the fourth specified light receiving portion 2612 d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) Then, from left to right in order, it is arranged in two rounds (the fourth specified light receiving portion 2612 d is returned to the beginning first to become the first specified light receiving portion 2612 a).

  The reflective recess 2613 has a flat surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612 and inclined 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 . The reflective recess 2613 is recessed in a pentroof triangle. The reflective recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. In addition, the reflective recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the specific light receiving portion 2612 not corresponding thereto in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611.

  Thereby, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612, it is reflected to the front of the light guide plate main body 2611 (vertical direction with respect to the paper surface) by the reflective recess 2613. From the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflective recess 2613 appears to emit light. On the other hand, as shown by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the specific incident light portion 2612 which does not correspond, the light is reflected by the reflective recess 2613 in directions other than the front of the light guide plate main body 2611; The player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 looks as if the reflective recess 2613 does not emit light.

  In the present embodiment, as the reflection recess 2613, the reflection recess 2613 has a form in which it is extended in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light entrance 2612 in a state of being recessed in a triangle. It does not need to be limited to, and may be extended in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612.

  The plurality of reflective recesses 2613 correspond to any one of the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflective recesses 2613a corresponding to the first specific light entrance portion 2612a, the second specific light entrance portion 2612b. Of the second reflecting recesses 2613b corresponding to the third specific light receiving portion 2612c and the fourth reflecting portions 2613c corresponding to the fourth specific light receiving portion 2612d And a recess 2613d.

  In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 capable of light emission display in different modes by reflecting light in a specific group of the plurality of reflection recesses 2613 in the forward direction. There is. The plurality of patterns 2614 includes a first pattern 2614a consisting only of a plurality of first reflecting recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b consisting only of a plurality of second reflecting recesses 2613b, and a third consisting only of a plurality of third reflecting recesses 2613c It is comprised from pattern 2614c and 4th pattern 2614d which consists only of several 4th reflective recessed part 2613d.

  The first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentrically arranged in order from the outside to the center as shown in FIGS. 101 and 104, etc. (following the fourth pattern 2614d) Are arranged so as to return first to become the first pattern 2614a).

  The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. The reflector 2620 can hold the front and back sides of the front light guide plate 2610 by inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. In the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixing recess 2621, through holes 2622 vertically penetrating are formed in the portions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640.

  The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 has a strip-like shape extending in the left and right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on the lower surface at a position immediately above the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (mounted) on portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620, respectively. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is formed on the top surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 can face downward through the through holes 2622, respectively.

  The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached to correspond to the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 includes a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light receiving portion 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light receiving portion 2612b, and a third specific light receiving portion 2612c. And a fourth LED group 2630 d corresponding to the fourth specific light receiving portion 2612 d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide the plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction. In order, the circuit is arranged in two rounds (the order next to the fourth LED group 2630d returns to the first LED group 2630a). In the present embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630.

  Next, the light emission effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light, the light is made incident from the first specific light entrance portion 2612a into the light guide plate main body 2611 and is reflected to the front at the first reflection recess 2613a. Since the two reflection recesses 2613b, the third reflection recesses 2613c, and the fourth reflection recesses 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the first reflection recesses 2613a can be seen as shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The first pattern 2614a configured of the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 104 (a)).

  When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light, the light is made incident from the second specified light entrance portion 2612b into the light guide plate main body 2611, and is reflected to the front by the second reflection recess 2613b. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflecting recess 2613b can be seen as shining from the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The second pattern 2614b composed of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 104 (b)).

  When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light, the light is made incident from the third specific light entrance portion 2612c into the light guide plate main body 2611, and is reflected to the front at the third reflection recess 2613c. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the second reflection recess 2613b, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflection recess 2613c can be seen as shining from the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The third pattern 2614c configured of the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 104 (c)).

  When the fourth LED group 2630 d of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light, the light is made incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612 d into the light guide plate main body 2611 and is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection recess 2613 d. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the third reflecting recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting recess 2613d will be seen as shining from the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The fourth pattern 2614d configured by the plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d can emit light (see FIG. 104 (d)).

  As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be respectively emitted, the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be divided into a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, a fourth When light is emitted in the order of the LED group 2630d, light can be emitted in the order of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center It is possible to perform light emission effects such as animation.

  On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630 d, the third LED group 2630 c, the second LED group 2630 b, and the first LED group 2630 a, a fourth pattern 2614 d, a third pattern 2614 c, a second pattern Light can be emitted in the order of the pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a, and light-emitting effects such as animation with a motion that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

  As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be made to emit light by the front light guide plate 2610 of one sheet. There is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center character 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a large space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. It can be made easy to secure. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper back movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged to improve the appearance of the game area 5a to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and in addition to the effect by the light emission display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect By performing movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., various effects can be provided to the player, and the player is entertained to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105, a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 due to point-like light emission of the plurality of reflection concave portions 2613 are floated up by the front light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. Since a moving light emitting decoration can be shown like animation, a strong impact can be given to a player who is familiar with light emitting effects using a conventional light guide plate, and the player can be surprised and entertained. The player can be made to think that something is good, and the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since only the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 can favorably view the light emission display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, the other players away from the front view the pattern 2614. It can be difficult to notice that the light emitting display is hard to be seen, and that the effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is performed to the other player, and the other player is prevented from paying attention As a result, the player can play the game without hesitation to other players, and can enjoy the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached by being sandwiched by the fixing concave portions 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thus, the LEDs 2630 (the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d) are disposed at positions corresponding to the specific light entering portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each of the LEDs 2630 can be reflected forward to the front by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably emitted.

  Furthermore, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted within the frame of the center character 2500 to which the center character 2500 is attached at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, light is emitted even if the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light by the LED 2630 The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making it difficult to see the game. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted and to enjoy the game in a good state.

  In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where the light guide plate 2610 is attached by two members. The backlash between them can be eliminated, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at the desired position with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned relative to the specific light entrance portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 Luminescent display can be reliably performed.

  Furthermore, since the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is disposed only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611 by arranging the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, The rear of the light guide plate main body 2611 is not surrounded by the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630), and the rear cover (frame) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid dividing the effect image or decoration of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the present invention, the effect image etc. can be easily viewed from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. While being able to entertain in a good state and suppress the decline in interest, there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in front view. In a feeling of opening may be a pachinko machine 1, can be assumed to be appealing is strongly attracted the attention of a player to improve the appearance of the game area 5a.

  In addition, since the front surface light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center character 2500, the peripheral edge of the front surface light guide plate 2610 and the frame of the center character 2500 are aligned with each other. And the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be made difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to surprise the player who thought that 2610 does not exist by giving a strong impact to the player and enjoying the light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  Furthermore, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 from the player side, the appearance of the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated by the reflectors 2620 etc. being seen. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By making the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display not predicted by the player, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and the player is entertained. It can be made to think that there is something good for it, and it is possible to make the expectation for the game higher and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 Therefore, it is possible to show various effects to the player by combining them appropriately, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 are displayed. Thus, the player can be entertained by the effect produced by the player, and the decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 Is different, and by displaying effect images associated with the plurality of patterns 2614 light-emitting and displayed by the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the pattern 2614 being light-emitting and displayed. The effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In the above embodiment, although the reflecting concave portion 2613 has a triangular cross section and extends constantly, the present invention is not limited to this, and a cross section having a semicircular arc shape and extending regularly, a cross section There may be a polygon having a constant length, a cross section having a curved shape and a constant length, or the like.

  In addition, the LED 2630 may be a single color or a full color. In addition, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light entrance portion, the reflective recess, and the LED group can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing the lower front central decoration in the lower movable presentation unit in a light emitting state, and FIG. 107 is the lower front central decoration in the lower movable presentation unit by raising the lower central elevator base FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board showing the lower rear central decoration lighted, and FIG. 108 shows the lower movable elevator base, the lower left side elevator base and the lower right side elevator base raised in the lower movable effect unit to lower front It is a front view of the game board which shows the central decorative body, the lower back central decorative body, the lower left side decorative body, and the lower right side decoration in a light emitting state. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position with the gaming board in the state of FIG. Further, FIG. 110 shows the four rotary ornaments in the lower movable effect unit, the left side rotary ornament, the left sub-side rotary ornament, the right side rotary ornament, and the right sub-side rotary ornament, respectively, It is an explanatory view showing an outline of a. FIG. 111 is an explanatory view schematically showing types (sizes) of arrows displayed by light emission in the lower movable effect unit.

  FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board showing the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 113 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 114 is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 116 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable presentation unit.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects gaming balls B received in the general winning openings 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects gaming balls B received in the first starting opening 2002. A magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the magnetic force acting on the vicinity of the first start port 2002 is provided (see FIG. 117).

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder and open at the front, and has a back box having a square opening for the effect display device 1600 to face the back wall, and a lower portion in the back box. A lower movable effect unit 3100 attached, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box, and an upper front attached to the upper rear in the rear box to the front of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 And a movable effect unit 3300.

[5-9a. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower portion in the back box, and a part thereof is located in front of the lower portion of the effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is a lower front central decoration unit 3110 mounted below the effect display device 1600 and near the front end of the back box and a lower central effect unit arranged behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110 3120 and a lower left side rendering unit 3150 and a lower right side rendering unit 3170 disposed respectively on the left and right sides of the lower center rendering unit 3120.

  The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is provided with a lower front central decoration 3111 having a light transmitting property in a trapezoidal shape (inverted isosceles triangle with its apex flat) which is narrowed downward. The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center character 2500 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 in the assembled state on the game board 5. The lower front central decorative body 3111 is capable of emitting light by the lower central decorative substrate of the lower central rendering unit 3120.

  The lower central rendering unit 3120 is mounted on the lower central elevator base 3121 which is vertically movably mounted in the back box at the rear of the lower front central decorative unit 3110, and is attached to the front of the lower central elevator base 3121 A lower central decorative substrate (shown in the figure is mounted with a plurality of LEDs disposed on the back side of the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower rear central decoration 3122 and capable of emitting light forward). And a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper portion of the lower central lift base 3121.

  Also, although the lower central rendering unit 3120 is not shown, a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower central elevating base in the vertical direction, and a unit A rod-like arm member whose base end is rotatably attached to a base extending in the longitudinal direction and a slide pin attached to a tip of the arm member and inserted into a slit of the lower central lift base 3121; And a lower central raising and lowering drive motor to be rotated.

  The lower central lift base 3121 has a slit (not shown) extending in the left and right directions, and a slide pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted in the slit. The lower central elevating base 3121 is between the lowered position where the whole is behind the lower front central ornament 3111 and the raised position where the whole is above the lower front central ornament 3111 by the lower central elevating drive motor. It is mounted to be able to move up and down.

  The lower rear central decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape and has a plurality of light emitting areas 3122 a arranged in the vertical direction. The lower back central decoration 3122 can be lighted and decorated by the light emission of the LED of the lower central decoration substrate. The lower central decorative substrate is mounted such that a plurality of LEDs can light-emittingly decorate each light emitting area 3122a of the lower rear central decorative body 3122 independently, and the lower central elevating base 3121 is raised. At times, light is mounted to be able to emit light toward the lower front center decoration 3111 that is downward and forward.

  The central movable unit 3125 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 with a gap in the left-right direction, and a plurality of mounting bases each extending in a flat plate shape; A plurality of central rotary drive motors are mounted on the plurality of mounting bases with the rotary shaft directed in the left-right direction, and are mounted on the rotary shafts of each central rotary drive motor, and the outer periphery of each central rotary drive motor And a plurality of cube-shaped rotating ornaments 3126 covering them. The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 are rotatable about an axis extending left and right by a central rotary drive motor, and are arranged coaxially in the left-right direction. In addition, in each of the rotary ornaments 3126, different decorative portions 3127 are formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). The plurality of rotating ornaments 3126 can be independently rotated by the respective central rotation drive motors.

  The central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121 below each of the rotary ornaments 3126, although not shown, and can emit light toward the respective rotary ornaments 3126. It has a lower center top decoration board on which the LED is mounted. By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the lower central upper surface decoration substrate, it is possible to cause each of the rotating ornaments 3126 to emit light and decorate.

  Although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 of the lower movable rendering unit 3100 is not shown in detail, it has a flat lower portion extending horizontally and a flat side extending upward from the left end of the lower portion. It has a flat upper side extending to the upper side of the lower piece from the upper end of the side and upper side of the side and shorter to the right than the lower piece, and the front face of the unit base of the lower central rendering unit 3120 The left unit base mounted in the back box on the left side of the view, and a cylindrical guide shaft with the lower end and the upper end respectively attached to the lower piece and the upper piece near the right side of the side of the left unit base And a rod-shaped male screw member rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down by the lower and upper piece portions of the left unit base so as to extend in parallel with the guide shaft, and an outer thread is formed on the outer periphery And the male screw member A lower left side lifting base 3151 having a fitted nut and slidably mounted on a guide shaft, a lower left side lifting drive motor mounted on a left unit base and rotating a male screw member, and a lower portion It is attached to the front of the left side lifting base 3151 and attached to the right side of the translucent lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower left side decoration 3152 and can emit light towards the left And a lower left side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3152a arranged in a line in the vertical direction, and by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate, each light emitting area Each 3152a can be lighted and decorated independently.

  Also, although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 is not shown in detail, it is slidably mounted on the upper portion of the lower left side lifting base 3151 in the left-right direction and has a slider extending in the front and rear direction; The lower left slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower left side lift base 3151 so that the rotation axis extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotation axis of the lower left slide drive motor And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the base end side.

  Furthermore, although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 is not shown in detail, with the mounting base attached to the slider and extending in the form of a flat plate upward, with the rotation axis directed to the mounting base in the left-right direction The left side rotary drive motor is attached, and the cube-shaped left side rotary ornament 3153 is attached to the rotary shaft of the left side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left side rotary drive motor. In the left side rotary ornament 3153, different decorative portions 3154 are formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). The left side rotary ornament 3153 is rotatable about an axis extending leftward and rightward by a left side rotary drive motor.

  The lower left-side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the slider below the left-side rotating ornament 3153 and can emit light toward the left-side rotating ornament 3153 although not shown in detail. It has a lower left side upper surface decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left side upper face decoration substrate, the left side rotary decoration 3153 can be made to emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the left unit base and to the sub mounting base which extends flatly upward and the sub mounting base. A cube-shaped left sub-side rotation motor attached to the left sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis facing in the left-right direction and the rotation shaft of the left sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the left sub-side rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3155. In the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, different decorative portions 3156 are formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). The left sub-side rotary ornament 3155 is rotatable about an axis extending in the left and right direction by the left sub-side rotary drive motor.

  Further, although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper surface of the upper part of the left unit base below the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155 and headed toward the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155 The lower left sub-side upper surface decoration substrate is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light. The light emission decoration of the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 can be performed by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left sub-side upper surface decoration substrate.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 is a lower part of the left sub side rotating decoration 3155 attached to the left unit base at a height to which the left side rotating decoration 3153 can enter downward when assembled on the game board 5. The lower central lifting base 3121 of the central rendering unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 when the lower central lifting base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the rising end. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is a left side effect element 3153 between the left side effect element 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 and the left element 3126 when the left sub side effect element 3155 is assembled on the game board 5. There is an open space where

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevation drive motor, whereby the left side rotary ornament 3153 together with the slider via the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower center effect unit 3120 The lower central lifting base 3121 can be raised and lowered between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decoration 3126 in the lowered position and a raised position at the same height as the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155. Also, the lower left side rendering unit 3150 rotates the cam member with the lower left slide drive motor to move the left side rotary decoration 3153 through the slider closer to the lower central rendering unit 3120 and an adjacent position. The left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 may be slid away from the lower central rendering unit 3120 in the left-right direction.

  Although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 of the lower movable rendering unit 3100 is not shown in detail, it has a flat lower portion extending horizontally and a flat side extending upward from the right end of the lower portion. It has a flat upper side extending to the upper side of the lower piece from the upper end of the side and upper side of the side and is shorter than the lower piece to the left, and the front face of the unit base of the lower central rendering unit 3120 Right unit base mounted in the back box on the right side of the view, and cylindrical guide shaft with lower end and upper end attached to lower and upper pieces respectively near the left side of the side of the right unit base And a rod-shaped male screw member rotatably mounted on an axis extending up and down by a lower piece and an upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend in parallel with the guide shaft, and an outer thread is formed on the outer periphery And the male screw member A lower right side lifting base 3171 having a fitted nut and slidably mounted on a guide shaft, a lower right side lifting drive motor mounted on a right unit base and rotating a male screw member, and a lower portion A light transmitting lower right side decoration 3172 attached to the front of the right side elevation base 3171 and a right side of the lower right side decoration 3172 can be irradiated with light toward the right And a lower right side decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3172a arranged in a line in the vertical direction, and by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate, each light emitting area Each 3172a can be illuminated and decorated independently.

  Also, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is slidably mounted on the upper portion of the lower right side lifting base 3171 in the lateral direction and has a slider extending in the front and rear direction; The lower right slide drive motor mounted on the rear side of the lower right side lift base 3171 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side mounted on the rotary shaft of the lower right slide drive motor And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the base end side.

  Furthermore, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, with the mounting base attached to the slider and extending in the form of a flat plate upward, with the rotation axis directed to the mounting base in the left-right direction The right side rotary drive motor is attached, and the cube-shaped right side rotary ornament 3173 is attached to the rotary shaft of the right side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right side rotary drive motor. In the right-side rotary ornament 3173, different decorative portions 3174 are formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). Further, the right side rotary ornament 3173 is rotatable about an axis extending in the left and right direction by the right side rotary drive motor.

  Further, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached below the right side rotary ornament 3173 on the upper surface of the slider and can emit light toward the right side rotary ornament 3173 It has a lower right side upper surface decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right side upper surface decoration substrate, the right side rotating decoration 3173 can be made to emit light.

  Furthermore, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the right unit base and extends in a flat plate shape upward to the sub mounting base and the sub mounting base. A cube-shaped right sub-side rotation motor attached to the right sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis directed in the left-right direction and the rotation shaft of the right sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the right sub-side rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3175. In the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175, different decorative portions 3176 are formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 110). The right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 is rotatable about an axis extending in the left and right directions by the right sub-side rotary drive motor.

  Also, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper surface of the upper part of the right unit base below the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 and headed toward the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 The lower right sub-side upper surface decoration substrate is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light. The light emission decoration of the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 can be performed by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decoration substrate.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 is a lower part of the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 attached to the right unit base at a height to which the right side rotating decoration 3173 can enter downward when assembled on the game board 5. The lower central lifting base 3121 of the central rendering unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 when the lower central lifting base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the rising end. In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is a right side effect 3173 between the right sub turning effect 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 when the right sub side effect 3175 is assembled on the game board 5. There is an open space where

  The lower right side rendering unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side lifting drive motor, thereby combining the slider with the slider via the lower right side lifting base 3171 and the lower center rendering unit 3120. The lower central lifting base 3121 can be raised and lowered between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decoration 3126 in the lowered position and a raised position at the same height as the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. Also, the lower right side rendering unit 3170 rotates the cam member with the lower right slide drive motor to move the right side rotary decoration 3173 through the slider closer to the lower center rendering unit 3120 and to an adjacent position. The slide can be made to slide in the left-right direction between a lower central rendering unit 3120 and a retracted position located about a half of the lower right side rotating decoration 3175 away from the lower central rendering unit 3120.

  The lower movable effect unit 3100 is, as shown in FIG. 110, the respective decorative portions 3127 of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126, the decorative portions 3154 of the left side rotary decorative body 3153, the decorative portions 3156 of the left sub-side rotary decorative body 3155, and the right Different decorations are formed on the decoration portion 3174 of the side rotation decoration 3173 and the decoration portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175. The four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 are each formed in a cube of a dice shape and extend left and right Different decorations are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the rotation axis.

  With the first faces of the four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decoration 3153, left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, right side rotating decoration 3173, and right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 facing the front, from the left "One eye" "one eye" "one eye" "two eye" "third eye" "four eye" "one eye" "one eye" has become. In addition, when the second surface of each is directed to the front, "star" "super" "chi" "ch" "n" "s" "!" "Star" from the left. In addition, when the third side is directed to the front, "!" "凰" "ゲ" "キ" "ア" "ツ" "凰" "!" From the left. Furthermore, when the fourth side is directed to the front, "Congratulation", "!", "O", "Me", "De", "To", "U" and "!!" are from the left.

  In this manner, the faces of the same number are respectively directed to the front with the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. Thus, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expectation value to be a "big hit" can be displayed according to the content of the message.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower back center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light as appropriate. The "arrows" of different sizes can be displayed in a luminous manner. Specifically, when only the lower front central decorative body 3111 is made to emit light, a triangular "small arrow" whose apex of the isosceles triangle is directed downward can be emitted and displayed (Fig. 106 and Fig. 111 (a) reference). In addition, when the lower front central ornament 3111 and the lower rear central ornament 3122 are caused to emit light, the downward middle "middle arrow" having a rod extending upward more than the "small arrow" is caused to emit light. (See FIG. 107 and FIG. 111 (b)). Furthermore, in the state of "middle arrow", lower left side decoration 3152 and lower right side decoration 3172 are raised, lower front center decoration 3111, lower back center decoration 3122, lower left side decoration 3152, lower right When all the side decorations 3172 are made to emit light, it is possible to emit and display a "large arrow" in which the upper end of the arrow pointing downward more than the "middle arrow" spreads to the left and right (FIG. 108 and FIG. See).

  As described above, since three arrows of different sizes of "small arrow", "middle arrow" and "large arrow" can be displayed by light emission, "big hit" in the order of "small arrow", "middle arrow" and "big arrow" It can be made to emit light and display that the expectation value which becomes "" is high.

  Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the lower movable effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like in a normal state, in the lower central effect unit 3120, the lower central elevating base 3121 becomes the rear of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and a lowered position not visible from the front The four rotating decorative bodies 3126, which are located at the upper end of the lower central lifting base 3121, are positioned in contact with the upper end of the lower front central decorative body 3111 in a front view.

  Further, in the normal state, in the lower left side rendering unit 3150, the lower left side lifting base 3151 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and at a lowered position hardly visible from the front, The left side rotary ornament 3153 is separated from the lower central rendering unit 3120 to the left through the slider, and a half of the left side rotary ornament 3153 is located below the left sub side rotary ornament 3155, and the left sub side rotary ornament 3155 It is located in the vicinity of the lower end in the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, in the lower right side rendering unit 3170, the lower right side lifting base 3171 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 at a lowered position hardly visible from the front, The right side rotation decoration 3173 is separated from the lower center rendering unit 3120 to the right through the slider, and a half is located at the retreat position where the lower half of the right sub side rotation decoration 3175 is located. It is located in the vicinity of the lower end in the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  In this normal state, as one of the effects to be presented to the player, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotary ornaments 3126, the rotation of the respective rotary ornaments 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in the respective rotary ornaments 3126 whose rotation is stopped Make the player visually recognize As a result, the player can be sloppy and pounding on the basis of whether or not the rotation of the four rotating ornaments 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the moving effects by the four rotating ornaments 3126 can be enjoyed. The lower back center decoration 3122 is attached to the lower center lifting base 3121 by the lower center decoration substrate when the combination of the respective decoration portions 3127 of the four rotation decoration bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfy the predetermined condition. The light emitting decoration is performed on the lower front central decoration 3111 of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 located on the front side. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106, the lower front central decorative body 3111 causes the downward arrow to be displayed by light emission, and the line of sight of the player is displayed below the game area 5a by the light emission display of the downward arrow. The player can be guided to the effect operating unit 301 disposed in the main body, and can urge the player to operate the effect operating unit 301 and easily participate in the player participation type effect operating the effect operating unit 301 It is possible to make the player enjoy the player participation type effect and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Alternatively, based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game ball B to first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 from the normal state, lower central lifting base 3121 Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view gaming area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to surprise the player and make the player think that there is something good to be done, which can increase the sense of expectation for the game. Thereafter, after rotating the four rotating ornaments 3126, the rotation of the respective rotating ornaments 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each of the rotating ornaments 3126 stopped rotating is given to the player Make it visible. Thus, when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination with respect to the player, it may be considered as "big hit" (a lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs). The player can be snarled and pounded by whether or not the rotation of the four rotating ornaments 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the expectation for the lottery result can be enhanced. Then, when the combination of the respective decoration parts 3127 of the four rotation decoration bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfy a predetermined condition, a plurality of lower central decoration substrates attached to the rising lower central elevating base 3121 The LED is made to emit light, and the lower rear central decoration 3122 disposed in the front and the lower front central decoration 3111 disposed in the lower front are emitted and decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107, a large downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111. Therefore, the luminous display of the large downward arrow causes the game to be played. The line of sight of the elderly person can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to urge the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be It can be thought that it becomes a "big hit" by operating, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by reception of game ball B to first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 from the normal state, lower central lifting base 3121 Is raised from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view gaming area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to surprise the player and make the player think that there is something good to be done, which can increase the sense of expectation for the game. Subsequently, the left and right left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornaments 3173 are respectively slid to the center side appearance position, and then the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower right side elevation base 3171 are respectively arranged. Raise to the raised position (see FIG. 108). As a result, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to make an expectation of the game to be heightened by making it think that the lottery result is not a "big hit". After that, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 are rotated and then stopped rotating. The decoration 3156 of the sub-side rotation decoration 3155, the decoration 3154 of the left side rotation decoration 3153, the decoration 3127 of each of the four rotation decorations 3126, the decoration 3174 of the right side rotation decoration 3173, and the right subside rotation decoration The player is allowed to visually recognize the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decorative portions 3127 includes the decorative portion 3127 on which the decoration of the number is applied, the countdown is performed by stopping the rotation so that the decorative portion 3127 of the number faces forward. It is possible to perform such an effect, and to make the player have an interest in the game by making the player think that the lottery result must be a "big hit" by the effect of the countdown. Then, when the rotation of the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 is stopped and the countdown is completed, The lower front central decoration 3111, the lower back central decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 are lighted and decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, since a further downward arrow (big arrow) is displayed in a luminous manner, the player operates the effect operation unit 301 disposed at the tip of the huge arrow. The player can be convinced that the lottery result is a "big hit", and the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 with certainty. When the huge arrow is light-displayed, a message explaining the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the rotation of the effect operation unit 301 is performed. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 109). As a result, the player's interest can be enhanced by rotating the rotation operation part 302 at a high speed, so that the pressing operation part 303 can be surely pressed and the player's enjoyment is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  As the effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 109, the characters “The lower button is hot!” Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the player is made to pay attention to the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation operation is performed. The faster the rotational speed of the unit 302 is, the higher the expected value for the "big hit" is notified to the player. That is, the expectation value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and the effect display device 1600 displays the effect image for notifying the player of the expectation value.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 109, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 is, as shown in FIG. 111, lower front center decoration 3111, lower back center decoration 3122, lower left side decoration An effect image may be displayed that suggests an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the player's operation is prompted by the “arrow” light-emittingly displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decoration 3172 or the like. Specifically, effect images such as “press a button!”, “Turn the dial!”, “Turn the dial to the left!”, “Turn the dial to the right!”, And the like are displayed. As a result, the operation in the effect operation unit 301 can be accurately performed, and the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit 301 can be surely enjoyed.

  Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an expected value to be a "big hit" may be displayed by the effect image. Expected values are calculated using the four rotary decorations 3126, the left side rotary decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155, the right side rotary decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape. It may be displayed.

  As display of expected value using four rotating ornaments 3126, left side rotating ornaments 3153, left sub-side rotating ornaments 3155, right side rotating ornaments 3173, and right sub-side rotating ornaments 3175 which are respectively formed in a dice shape The effect of displaying a "big hit" expected value is performed by a combination of the decorative parts 3127, the decorative parts 3154, the decorative parts 3156, the decorative parts 3174, and the decorative parts 3176 facing the front by each rotation and stop. . Specifically, in the case where only the four rotating ornaments 3126 of the lower central rendering unit 3120 at the center are used, there are, for example, the following three patterns. In the pattern a1, the expected value is displayed in the state of the combination of pieces of combination in which the player can not read the meaning, with the combination of the decorative parts 3127 facing each front when the four rotating ornaments 3126 stop rotating. No pattern. In the pattern a2, the expected value is somewhat high when the combination of the decorative parts 3127 is “chi”, “ch”, “ch”, “s” when the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating with the second surface facing forward. The pattern showing that. The pattern a3 has extremely high expectation values, with the combination of the decorative parts 3127 being in the state of “G”, “K”, “A”, and “T” when the respective rotating decorative members 3126 stop rotating with the third surface facing forward. The pattern showing that. As described above, the expected value can be displayed by the patterns displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotary ornaments 3126, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of the pattern a1, the pattern a2, and the pattern a3.

  Furthermore, as effects using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotary ornaments 3126, left side rotary ornaments 3153, left sub-side rotary ornaments 3155, right side rotary ornaments 3173, right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 ( An effect of displaying an expected value that would be a "big hit" by combining the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 using dice-shaped rotating bodies of eight) You may do so. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. The pattern b1 is a combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 whose rotation is stopped (the expectation value is not displayed). In the pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "が" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "チ" "ャ" The combination of the right side rotation decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is “凰” or “star” (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "g" "「 " A combination of “ツ”, “T”, the right-side rotating decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is “凰” or “star” (represented by “Gekitsu”). In the pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating ornament 3153 is "super", and the four central rotating ornaments 3126 are "チ" "ャ" "ス" "A combination of the right side rotation decoration 3173 is"! "And the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is" 凰 "or" star "(super chance display). In the pattern b5, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left side rotary ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four central rotary ornaments 3126 are “ge” “ki” “a” “ "A combination of the right side rotation decoration 3173 is"! ", And the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is" 凰 "or" star "(super Geography display). In pattern b6, left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is "holiday", left side rotating ornament 3153 is "!", And four central rotating ornaments 3126 are "o" "me" "de" "to" right side The combination of the rotary ornament 3173 is “U” and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 is “!!” (“big hit” confirmed). Thus, the rotation is stopped by the eight rotating bodies of four rotating decorative bodies 3126, left side rotating decorative body 3153, left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, right side rotating decorative body 3173, right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of the pattern b1, the pattern b2, the pattern b3, the pattern b4, the pattern b5, and the pattern b6.

  In the above-mentioned effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the expected value as described above is not performed. , The light emission display of "arrow" is also turned off. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, such effect that displays the above expected value using the remaining effect time When the effect time is over, the effect as described above is finished, and the light emission display of "arrow" is also turned off, and the effect is finished.

  As described above, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the gaming state is changed due to the game being performed in the gaming area 5a in the normal state (the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating ornaments 3126 aligned on the upper side of the lower front center ornament 3111 are rotated or the lower center The four rotary ornaments 3126 aligned side by side with the lift base 3121 ascend with the lower rear central ornament 3122 or the four rotary ornaments 3126 raised by the lower central elevator base 3121 rotate or lower left Lower left slide drive motor of side effect unit 3150, lower right slide drive motor of lower right side effect unit 3170, etc. Structure), the left side rotation decoration 3153 and the right side rotation decoration 3173 slide in the left and right direction, the left side rotation decoration 3153 and the right side rotation decoration 3173 rotate, the slide mechanism and the lower left side Four rotating decorative bodies 3126 and left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 in which the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 are elevated by the lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 It is possible to show the player a moving effect such that the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged side by side, or the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 or the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. Rotating decoration 3126), left side rotating decoration 3153 and right side turn Decorative body 3173, and it is possible to focus on the left Sabusaido rotary decoration member 3155 and the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  In addition, when the lower central lift base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower back central decoration 3122 is made to emit light to cause the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light, thereby displaying a downward arrow light emission, or the lower central lift The base 3121 is raised, and a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration substrate cause the lower back central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light, thereby causing a large downward arrow to be emitted, or a pair of lower left side elevators Since the larger downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light by raising the base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 and causing the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light, the light emission can be displayed. The player can be entertained also by the effect, and the light emitting display is directed downward. It is possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301 by the mark, it is possible to urge the operation of staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the player participates in the effect by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302, rotating the rotation operation unit 302, pressing the pressing operation unit 303, or the like. Can be entertained.

  Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation types of effects as described above can be performed, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to predict the effect pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by the unexpected effect being performed, and the player Can be controlled to suppress the decline in interest for the game.

  In addition, as described above, the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower back center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, the lower right side decoration 3172, and the like cause a downward arrow to be emitted and displayed to the player. An effect image for prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image for explaining the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an advantage game state in which the player is advantageous when the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted. By displaying an effect image or the like indicating the relationship between the occurrence of the effect and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly urge the player to participate in the player participation type effect which operates the effect operation unit 301, The effect operation unit 301 can be easily operated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9b. Upper rear movable effect unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper portion in the back box above the effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box, and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the left base 3211 mounted in the back box and the left base 3211 so as to be slidable obliquely from upper left to lower right, although detailed illustration is omitted. Left slider 3212, a straight rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, an upper back left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with its rotation axis directed to the front and back, and an upper back left A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and having the rotary shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 connected to the input side, and a spur gear drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250; A spur gear shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear 3215 and rotatably mounted on the left base 3211 Gear 3216 and a first transmission gear 3216 meshed with a second transmission gear 3217 having a spur gear shape rotatably mounted on the left base 3211 and a second transmission gear 3217 meshed with a left base 3211 A third transmission gear 3218 rotatably attached to the second transmission gear 3218 and a spur gear pinion gear 3219 meshing with the third transmission gear 3218 and the rack gear 3213 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211; Have.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and extends to the left and right in the form of a flat upper rear left decorative body 3220 and an upper rear left decorative body 3220. And an upper rear left decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 can emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear left decorative substrate.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decorative body 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

  The upper rear rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is slidably mounted in the right base 3231 mounted in the back box and the right base 3231 in an oblique direction from upper right to lower left, although detailed illustration is omitted. Right slider 3232, a straight rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, an upper rear right drive motor 3234 mounted with the rotation axis directed to the front direction in the right base 3231, and an upper rear right drive A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the motor 3234 and having the rotary shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234 connected to the input side, a spur gear drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250, and a drive A spur gear shaped first gear meshed with the gear 3235 and rotatably mounted on the right base 3231 Gear 3236 and a first transmission gear 3236 meshed with the second transmission gear 3237, and a second transmission gear 3237 meshed with the second transmission gear 3237. A third transmission gear 3238 rotatably attached to the second transmission gear 3238 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3239 meshing with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231; Have.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and extends to the left and right in the form of a flat upper rear right decoration 3240 and the rear of the upper rear right decoration 3240. In the upper rear right decoration substrate, which has a plurality of LEDs mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear right decorative substrate.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 can raise and lower the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234.

  The clutch mechanism 3250 includes a cylindrical storage case 3251, and a plurality of projections 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the storage case 3251 in the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper The input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and the plurality of transmission grooves 3253a in which the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252 is inserted with a clearance in the circumferential direction in the housing case 3251 The drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 protrudes from the plurality of cam surfaces 3253 b which are formed so that the distance between the input member 3252 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrower as they approach the protrusion 3252 a of the input member 3252. An output member 325 having an output shaft 3253c to which the A plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, a tightening spring 3255 for tightening the storage case 3251 from the outside, a storage case 3251 and It has an accommodation recess 3256a for accommodating the clamp spring 3255, and closes the accommodation housing 3256 attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231 and the accommodation recess 3256a of the body housing 3256 and outputs the output member 3253 A cover 3257 c having a shaft 3253 c penetrates, and a bearing 3258 attached to the cover 3257 and through which an output shaft 3253 c is inserted (see FIGS. 114 (a) to (c)).

  In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the plurality of projecting portions 3252 a of the input member 3252 is at the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253. When it abuts, the output member 3253 is rotated, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253 c of the output member 3253 is rotated. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can directly transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side.

  In addition, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output shaft 3253 c, the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 moves in the direction of the projecting portion 3252 a of the input member 3252 As a result, the gap between the cam surface 3253 b and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 is narrowed, and the roller 3254 is engaged therebetween. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, and the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is the upper rear via the input member 3252 It is not transmitted to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if force is applied to move the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 downward by gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 can drive the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output member 3253. Since rotation is locked, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 do not move downward without permission, and load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. Instead, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary position.

  In the clutch mechanism 3250 of this embodiment, the storage case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 consisting of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the storage case 3251 are stored in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output shaft 3253 c increases by a predetermined amount or more, the clamping force (biasing force) of the clamping spring 3255 The housing case 3251 is rotated against the above, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated by a strong force from the output side, a slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is reduced to the upper rear left Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper back right drive motor 3234 side and released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and the lock can not be released, or the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 are damaged. Can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the projecting portions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and also the two rollers 3254. Alternatively, each of the lock springs 3260 may be biased toward the projecting portion 3252a closer to the lock spring 3260, respectively. As a result, when force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. The rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from when the rotation from the upper back left decoration body 3220 side and the upper back right decoration body 3240 acts can be caught between the inner surface and the upper back left decoration body 3220 It can be reduced as much as possible.

  Next, the effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is positioned above the effect display device 1600 behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is not visible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are not driven respectively, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 do not move downward freely.

  Thus, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward to prevent downward movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is not necessary to provide an electrical lock mechanism for preventing the movement of the pachinko machine 1 and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, since the upper back rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 can be prevented from moving by the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250, the game board 5 is being transported, or the game hall is attached to the island facility The upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 remain at the state of the origin as shipped, even if vibration or acceleration at the time of etc. acts, and there is no need to perform unnecessary home adjustment. It is possible to reduce the time and effort for installing the game board 5, and to suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In this normal state, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of gaming balls B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move obliquely downward toward the center through the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220. And the left end of the upper rear right decoration 3240 abut to form one large decoration (see FIG. 112). As a result, a large decorative body extending to the left and right appears on the front upper portion of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  As described above, according to the upper rear movable presentation unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the decorative body 3240) and the decorative body 3240), vibration from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies etc. which can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and the upper portion Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate as the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 try to move downward due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253 b of the member 3253 The roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the upper back from the output member 3253 side (upper back left decoration 3220 side and upper back right decoration 3240 side) Since the transmission of the rotation to the left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is cut off and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 lower by themselves. Can be regulated, and the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be prevented from moving unexpectedly (falling) through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and the upper back Unintended movement of the left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 gives the player a sense of distrust Can be avoided, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to delight movement of the upper left rear decorative body 3220 and the upper right rear decorative body 3240 to the player.

  Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are going to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be stopped at any height position via the right slider 3232, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that are stopped moving up and down at the position, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. It can be done.

  In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the upper rear left The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the early breakage of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented and the upper portion It is possible to prevent interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the projecting portion 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock spring 3260. The roller 3254 is immediately urged to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper back left decoration 3220 side and the upper back right decoration 3240 side in the case of urging to the protrusion 3252 a close to each other. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and after the rotation from the upper rear left decoration 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration 3240 side acts, the lock The rotation of the output member 3253 can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel discomfort in the movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are moved downward to bring the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 into contact with each other, whereby the upper back left decoration 3220 and Since the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be united to form a large decorative body, the appearance of the large decorative body can give a strong impact to the player by causing the large decorative body to appear, and the player can be enjoyed It is possible to make it appear that an advantageous gaming state (eg, "big hit game") will be generated for the player by the appearance of a large decorative body, as well as the appearance of a large decorative body. The feeling can be enhanced to suppress the decline in interest. When the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 abut each other and unite, it is attempted to move the upper back right decoration 3240 or the upper back left decoration 3220 on the opposite side by bringing the other into contact with each other. Although each of the clutch mechanisms 3250 is provided, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are forced to move from the output side. Even if force is applied, the roller 3254 is engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 The upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be prevented from moving due to contact with each other, and the upper back left decoration can be prevented by reaction of the contact. It is also possible to prevent the body 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 from returning, and to ensure that the player enjoys the movable effect in which the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 abut and unite. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the accommodation case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodation case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodation recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. The roller 3254 is pressed by the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 to the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by rotating the 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the storage case 3251 is applied through the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the storage case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Between the containing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, when the housing case 3251 is rotated, the output member 3253 is rotated through the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the projecting portion 3252 a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated by a strong force from the output side, a slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is reduced to the upper rear left Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper back right drive motor 3234 side and released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and the lock can not be released, or the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 are damaged. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be embodied as a pachinko machine that can reliably prevent the operation and effects described above.

[5-9c. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is mounted on the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper portion in the back box above the effect display device 1600 in front view. The upper front movable rendering unit 3300 is vertically vertically movably mounted on the unit base 3301 and the upper front drive motor 3302 mounted on the unit base 3301 and the horizontally long unit base 3301 mounted on the upper portion in the back box. And an upper front movable decorative body 3350 which is raised and lowered by driving of an upper front drive motor 3302.

  The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is disposed on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 and the circular central decorative body 3351 mounted so as to be vertically movable (downward) at the center in the horizontal direction of the unit base 3301. A pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a connected to each other and rotatably mounted on a rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction A first projecting decorative body 3352 having a connecting rod 3352 b, a pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353 a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, and a pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353 a A second projection rotatably mounted on a rear side of the central decoration 3351 coaxially with the first connecting rod 3352b of the first protruding decoration 3352 and extending in the front-rear direction A second projecting decorative body 3353 having a Yuibo 3353B, and a.

  In the first protruding decorative body 3352, a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a is formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape whose bottom side is the central decorative body 3351 side. The pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a is such that the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed rearward of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the left side. The first projecting decorative body 3352 has a link attaching portion 3352c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the right side described later is rotatably attached at the tip of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side.

  In the second protruding decorative body 3353, a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353 a is formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape whose bottom side is the central decorative body 3351 side. In the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed in the front-rear direction behind the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. The second projecting decorative body 3353 has a link attaching portion 3353c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the left side described later is rotatably attached at the tip of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side.

  In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a of the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a of the second projecting decorative body 3353 have the same shape and the same size, respectively. There is. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side behind a first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the left side, and a first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side behind a second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. The first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are arranged to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  Although the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is not shown, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the front of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a. And a second projecting decorative portion decorative substrate, and a central decorative body 3351, a pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a, and a pair of upper front central decorative substrate, a first projecting decorative portion decorative substrate, and a second projecting decorative portion decorative substrate. The second projecting decorative portions 3353a can be independently light emitting and decorating.

  The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is mounted on the unit base 3301 so as to be symmetrical about the axis extending forward and backward at a symmetrical position across the center of the front surface in the left and right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod-like shape and a pair of first link rods 3303 are rotatably mounted around their axes whose proximal ends extend back and forth while their distal ends are the first protrusion A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably mounted around axes extending back and forth respectively to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative body 3353 and the front surface of the unit base 3301 Upper stopper 3305 that protrudes forward from the top to restrict the upward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303; and the lower side of the tip side of the first link rod 3303 It includes a lower stopper 3306, a for regulating the rotation.

  Next, effects using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 99 etc., the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is elevated, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. The first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 116 (a)). In this normal state, since the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap in the front-rear direction, the player can be recognized as one decorative body. Further, in the normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stoppers 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip end side moves upward is blocked.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Then, the central decorative body 3351, together with the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, moves the entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward. At this time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward while extending horizontally. When the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward, the right second link rod 3304 attached to the link attaching portion 3352 c of the right protruding first decorative portion 3352 a, and the left side The left second link rods 3304 attached to the link attachment portions 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a move downward respectively, and a pair of second link rods 3304 are attached to the respective tips. The first link rods 3303 rotate so that their tip ends move downward, respectively.

  Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 that rotate with the downward movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (central decorative body 3351) respectively abut the lower stoppers 3306, further rotation is blocked It will be in a state (refer FIG. 116 (b)). When the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward after the pair of first link rods 3303 abut on the lower stoppers 3306, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side are Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are the centers of the first connecting rod 3352 b and the second connecting rod 3353 b ( The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a opposite to the side on which the second link rod 3304 is attached are rotated about the center of the central decorative body 3351 in the downward movement direction. (See FIG. 116 (c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a disposed on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so that the scissors open. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged, and the player can be surprised to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 overlap in the front-rear direction to form one decorative body. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are opened so that their tips move away from each other. It is possible to surprise the player who has been recognized as one decoration, and to entertain the movement of the upper front movable decoration 3350.

  In addition, only by moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be It is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 because they can be opened by rotating in opposite directions with each other.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, as shown in FIG. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the gaming ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received by the first start hole 2002, and the second start detects the game ball B received by the second start hole 2004. A mouth sensor 2511, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting gaming balls B received in the general winning openings 2001, a gate sensor 2301 for detecting gaming balls B passing through the gate portion 2003, and a first winning prize opening 2005 The first count sensor 2512 for detecting the gaming ball B, the specific area sensor 2512a for detecting the gaming ball B received by the first large winning opening 2005 and distributed to the specific area by the distributing member, the second large winning opening 2006 A second count sensor 2513 for detecting the accepted gaming ball B, and a magnetic sensor 3 for detecting illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a 03, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O ports.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid 2516, output a drive signal to the distribution solenoid 2111, a status display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, a normal symbol display, a normal hold display, a first special symbol display, a first special The drive signal is output to the hold number display, the second special symbol display, the second special hold number display, the round display, etc.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first count sensor 2512, the specific area sensor 2512a, and the second count sensor 2513 are noncontact types. In contrast to using an electromagnetic proximity switch, a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2511 The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511 and the gate sensor 2301, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used.

  Also, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 is opened and the gaming ball B enters frequently. The detection of the gaming ball B by the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513. Further, since the specific area sensor 2512a is also an important (directly linked to the benefit of the player) sensor involved in the occurrence of a big hit game, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3001.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (gaming information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, etc. To Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the main control MPU will be described later in detail, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control substrate 1310 from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, as described in detail later. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The power failure notice signal is input not only to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, but also to a payout control board 633 or the like.

6-2. Disbursement control board]
The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B is a payout control unit 633a for performing various control relating to payout and a launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and a launch by which the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 is performed. Control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and the ball tank 552, tank rail at the time of maintenance 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and a ball extraction switch for discharging the gaming balls B in the payout device 580 to the outside (the upper tray 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball extraction operation.

6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 633 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout The apparatus includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball-off detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, or displays a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in serial mode via the payout control I / O port. Or, the number of balls of the gaming ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 633), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B gets caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 and notifies that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, "Count "It is a switch error" (specifically, it is informed that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed "Retry error" (specifically, notification that the number of payout retries has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the far cover unit 150 indicates that the game ball is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. At the same time, it informs that it is "CR not connected" (in other words, it indicates that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. It is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the lent gaming ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is the ball lending unit It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

6-2 b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633 b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not illustrated in detail, the emission control unit 633 b is provided with an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for firing the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the above, a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generating a ball-sending reference pulse by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputting the generated pulse to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or finger touches the handle 182, and whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball B according to the intention of the player A detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the drive current for shooting the game ball B toward the game area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, the firing reference pulse In response to the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit is a game ball stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side send. Thus, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 117, the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of

6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although the peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is selected based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for game board decoration drive board or For transmitting to the drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button up / down drive motor 367 etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of the side drive data and the lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the door side light emission data for outputting the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive substrate serial I / O port or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the display control unit serial I / O port In addition to transmission to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 are peripheral control MPUs Has been entered. Further, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives, from the effect display control unit 1512, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the peripheral display MPU of the effect display control unit 1512 I am monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 or the like. Control is performed so that sounds, such as music and sound effects, matched to various effects flow from the speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 or the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4 are acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is a built-in WDT and an external In conjunction with the WDT, it diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 km (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is used. k) BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, gaming board side lighting blink command, movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive substrate of the game board 5, have a plurality of serial inputs This is done by the output port, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect driving board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting blink command The lighting signal or the blinking signal is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 or the like.

  In addition, the effect drive board, the drive signal based on the received drive command, the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Output to

6-3 b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 performs display control of the effect display device 1600 as well as a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data. (An abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied Have.

  The display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. I have control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the image ROM in time series when transferring the various data to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance in the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

  The display control MPU extracts the screen data at the top of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the screen data at the top It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts drawing data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer method is adopted as VDP. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. Is a method of outputting to

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is increased. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, as the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as an integrated unit. For example, in the case of displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites will be used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the position to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relation (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 × 3 Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning to set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front, and main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. The effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line As main scanning, when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, the image data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right.

[7. Game content]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hit strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B in one minute continuously. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at a predetermined position in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nails. While the flow-down speed of the game ball B is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball B, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, the center is in contact with the plurality of obstacle nails It will flow down the area on the left side of the character 2500. Then, when the gaming ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

  The game balls B supplied to the stage 2503 roll on the stage 2503 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the gaming ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the gaming area 5a, the portion is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, so it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  The game balls B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left and right direction by the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B inserted into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the outermost portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed) , And emitted to the top of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center character 2500. In addition to the gate unit 2003 of the gate unit 2300, a second starting opening 2004 and a general winning opening 2001 of the center combination 2500 are provided in this part, and the gate unit 2003 is passed with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball B, which has been hit to the right, passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the second lottery opening is closed when the lottery result is “normal hit”. The state in which 2004 is open for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 to 15 seconds) allows the game ball B to be received in the second start port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are placed on the upper tray 201. Be paid out.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0) .08 to 20 seconds, commonly referred to as fluctuation time) The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result can not be started, The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is held until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”) advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 A drawing of a special drawing result is performed to generate “small hit” and “time reduced (short) hit”, and drawing is made because the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. If you win a big hit in the special lottery results, determine the jackpot type based on the symbol random number obtained at the time of entering the ball (hereinafter also referred to as a symbol random number (also referred to as a first special symbol random number, a second special symbol random number)) The game privilege (big hit game or play state after the big hit game) corresponding to the determined big hit (determined big hit type) of the determined type is to be granted as well. Beginning When a small hit is won in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball B being accepted in the mouth 2004, the symbol random number obtained at the time of entering the ball (hereinafter, symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol) Determined the small hit type based on the random number), and entered the specific area in the small bonus game or small hit game corresponding to the small hit (determined small hit type) of the determined type In the case of a big hit game to be executed, the game state after the big hit game) is to be granted.And the special lottery results drawn lottery, predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, special fluctuation time The jackpot type that is drawn for the game ball B to be accepted in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is “14R time shorts hit (14R time shorts hit A , 14 There are "time per week B)", "5 R time per year (5 R time per year A, 5 R time per year B per B)", etc. The small hit type is "5 R small hit (no V) (5 R small hit A1, 5 R small Per B1), "5R small per shot (V hour shorts per large) (5R small per square A2, 5R small per round B2)", "14R small per round (V hour shorts per large) (14R small per round A, 14R small per round B)", etc. Also, as will be described in detail later, for "5R small hit A2, B2" and "14R small hit A, B", a small hit that facilitates the entry of gaming balls into a specific area is set. For "5R small hit A1, B1", a small hit that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter a specific area is set compared to "5R small hit A2, B2" and "14R small hit A, B" It is done.

  The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 generate the advantageous gaming state In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 can receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When game ball B is accepted in first large winning opening 2005 or second large winning opening 2006 when first large winning opening 2005 or second large winning opening 2006 is open, main control substrate 1310 and payout control substrate 633. A predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 according to. Therefore, when the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 allows the game ball B to be received, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 can receive many game balls B. The game ball B can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first large winning opening 2005 becomes an open state where it can receive the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, for 1.8 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed is executed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit" or when the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 2005 in the small hitting game enters the specific area, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning combination After the mouth 2006 is opened to accept the game ball B, a predetermined long time (28.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed, or to the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 Opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) which makes the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state when any condition of reception of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied. Are repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "5R big hit", in the 5 rounds, and in the case of "14R big hit", 14 rounds each repeatedly, an award can be obtained by the player, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (big hit game) Generate

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are until the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted, the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started, so the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. This suppresses the increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. If the special drawing result drawn by the acceptance of gaming ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is suggested, the suggested special drawing result should be "big hit" and "small hit". For example, if the starting condition for drawing the next special drawing result is satisfied, and there is a special drawing result held in an unexecuted state in the main control board 1310, the special drawing result having the highest digesting order is It will be digested (executed) from

  The suggestion of the special lottery result (variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol)) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs. For example, if the special lottery result is "big hit", the LED is lit in a combination according to the big hit type (big hit symbol), and if the special lottery result is "small hit", the LED is lit in a combination according to the small hit type If the special lottery result is "lost", the special lottery result is suggested by lighting the LED in a combination different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (loss symbol).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is changed display after changing each pattern row in a state where three pattern rows (decorative symbols) consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction The stopped pattern row (decorative symbol) is displayed sequentially. Specifically, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, each symbol row is changed in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction After having made it, the symbol row which is variably displayed is sequentially stopped and displayed. At this time, the respective symbol rows are stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows stopped and displayed become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  Further, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of left row → right row → middle row when viewed from the player side, and two specific rows (two in this embodiment, two in the left and right When the same decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a row), a reach state is formed. In this embodiment, the left row is a first stop row, the right row is a second stop row, the middle row is a third stop row, and the left row and the right row form reach states among a plurality of symbol rows. It becomes.

  Here, the "temporary display" may appear during a period in which the special symbol is maintained in the changing state in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative symbol is displayed in a fluctuating state. On the other hand, the "fixed stop display" may appear when or after the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, In the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is a state in which any decoration pattern is stopped without fluctuating.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time. Further, when a time (variation time) suggesting a special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 has elapsed, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 described later. Until the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) receives a stop display command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), the effect display device 1600 does not completely stop the effect suggesting the special lottery result (for example, Swing fluctuation display), based on the reception of the stop display command, the effect that suggests the special lottery result is stopped (fixed display).

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 in the periphery control board 1510 according to the drawn special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, or the rotation operation can be inhibited. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the decoration boards provided in the door frame 3, the decoration boards provided in the game board 5, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the back unit 3000, and the upper rear It is possible to perform luminous effects, movable effects, etc. by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200 and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 etc. It is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's game It is possible to suppress the decline in interest to

  Furthermore, in the player control type player operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 on the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the operation to be operated by the player is mistaken or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player of that. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates or the like. The effect display device 1600 displays that effect.

  Further, in peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by effect display device 1600, a table effect unit of table unit 2000 in game board 5 according to the selected special lottery result. It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by suitably using 2600, a lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, an upper back movable effect unit 3200, an upper front movable effect unit 3300 etc. The player can also be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  As described above, when the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) stop at the big hit symbol, the main control board 1310 is played a big hit game in which a player can obtain a prize. At the time of execution of the big hit game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the big hit game is performed is generated. Then, when the opening period is over, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are set with the upper limit of the number of defined rounds (14 rounds in this embodiment) predetermined according to the determined jackpot type. A round game is performed (the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are made available to accept the game ball B). One round game should be performed by opening and closing the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 a predetermined number of times (one time in the present embodiment), and the first large winning combination during one round game During the period until the specified number (maximum number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) of the game balls B wins in the mouth 2005 or the second large winning hole 2006, or the specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) It is open until the lapse of). In round games, round effects are performed. Then, when the round game of the prescribed number of rounds is finished, an ending period (about 5 seconds in this embodiment) is generated in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game is performed, and when the ending period is ended, the big hit game is ended. Ru.

  In addition, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped by the small hit symbol, a small hit game is performed on the main control board 1310 in which a player can obtain a prize. At the time of execution of the small hit game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hit game is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period is over, the first large winning opening 2005 is opened (the first large winning opening 2005 is made ready to receive the game ball B). In the embodiment, the upper limit is performed once). During the first open game in the first large winning opening 2005, the specified number (the upper limit number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) of the game ball B to win or the specified time (open game time: in this example) It is open until 1.8 seconds have elapsed. In the open game, an open effect is performed. Then, when the open game of the defined open frequency is finished, an ending period (about 5 seconds in this embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hit game is generated is generated, and when the ending period is ended, the small hit game is It is finished.

  In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, after the end of the small hit game, there is a case that the big hit game is continuously generated. Although not shown, the first large winning opening 2005 is provided with a sorting member for sorting the gaming balls that have won the first big winning opening 2005 into the specific area and the discharge area, and the sorting solenoid is started when the small hitting game is started. According to 2111, operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode. Then, when the game ball B is won in the first large winning opening 2005 in the small hit game, and the winning game ball B is distributed to the internal specific area by the distributing member and detected by the specific area sensor 2512 a A round game is performed in which the second large winning opening 2006 is opened with an upper limit defined as the predetermined number of rounds (15 rounds in the present embodiment) predetermined in accordance with the small hit type determined. Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the small hit game described above, not only indicates the end of the small hit game, but also the game ball B distributed by the distribution member is a specific area inside the first large winning opening 2005 It is also indicated whether or not the big hit game is continuously performed from the small hit game whether or not it is detected by the sensor 2512 a. In addition, when making a big hit game continue and generate after the end of a small hit game, a small hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened is one round, and a number of round games including this one round Until the predetermined number of rounds is reached (from the second round to the fifteenth round), a round game in which the second large winning opening 2006 is opened is performed.

  In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, control is performed in a time-saving state after the end of the big hit game, in part when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are big hit symbols. In addition, the game ball B distributed by the distributing member during the small hitting game is detected by the specific area sensor 2512 a in a part of the case where the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the small hitting symbol. After the end of the big hit game which is executed based on the event, it is controlled to the time saving state. In this short time state, the result of the normal determination as to whether or not it is easy to win the game ball B in the second start port 2004 is derived as compared with the non-short time state (normal gaming state etc.) in which the short time state is not occurring. The variation time of the normal symbol variation is shortened, and the second start port 2004 opens and closes with an opening pattern different from the non-short time state when winning per common drawing in the normal determination (time saving control) .

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the win is made in the non-short time state, while the open pattern A in which the second start port 2004 opens and closes in the short open mode (0.05 second in this example) is performed, When the player wins the game in the state of the drawing, an opening pattern B is performed in which the second start port 2004 opens and closes in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example). That is, the second start port 2004 is set to operate advantageously for the player in the short time state as compared with the non-short time state, because the open / close time corresponding to one spread is long. For this reason, in the time saving state, compared with the case of the non-time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is in a state of improvement in the ball entry ratio which is easy to open and close. The ball B is accepted, and it becomes easy to perform the normal symbol variation according to the normal determination. In addition, judgment of whether it is a time saving state is made on the basis of the time when the normal symbol variation performed by the normal symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, specifically, when the normal symbol variation is stopped If the time is short, even if the time is short at the start of symbol variation, the opening pattern A for opening and closing the second start port 2004 in the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is executed. In the case where the time is short at the time of stopping the change, the open pattern B for opening and closing the second start port 2004 in the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) To be executed.

  According to the above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball B may be accepted by the second starting opening 2004 if the player continues to hit the right when the win is made in the time-saving state. There is a high probability that the game ball B will be received in the second start port 2004. On the other hand, when the player wins the game in the non-time-short state, the game ball B is not easily accepted in the second start port 2004. For this reason, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 is executed mainly in the non-short state, and the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 mainly in the time short state. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the acceptance is executed.

  In addition, in the time saving state according to this embodiment, the sum of the symbol variation of the first special symbol and the symbol variation of the second special symbol is predetermined after the end of the big hit game executed when the 14R hour junior high is won. The number of times (100 in this example: time reduction number) The time variation state A that is finished when executed and the 5R time reduction hit a big hit game when the big hit game is executed the symbol variation of the first special symbol is a predetermined number of times There is a time-shortened state B which is executed when (in this example, 5 times: time-savings) is executed, or when the second special symbol pattern variation is performed a predetermined number of times (1 time: time-savings in this example). In addition, after the end of the big hit game which is executed when 5R small hit (V hour short hit) is elected, it controls to time saving state B, when the 14R small hit (V hour short hit) is won the big hit game After completion, control is made to the time saving state A.

  Thus, in the non-short time state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the gaming ball B to the first starting opening 2002 is mainly executed, and in the short time state, the gaming ball B to the second starting opening 2004 mainly Of the second special symbol based on the acceptance of. In addition, in the time saving state B executed when 5R time short winning is won among the time saving states, the number of symbol variations executable during the time saving state B is set to 5 for the first special symbol In contrast to the second special symbol, it is set once, and the number of times (time savings) is different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second special symbol of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 is executed. When the variable display is executed, the player is put in an advantageous state. In addition, in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time short winning is won among the time saving states, the fluctuation time is 7 seconds when the first special symbol variation display is performed with the first special lottery result losing The second special lottery result is lost while it is set to (except for the hold reduction control (control for setting the change time shorter than normal (7 seconds when the hold number is 3 or more))). When the variation display of two special symbols is executed, the variation time is 16 seconds (The second special symbol does not perform the hold shortening control in the short time state B which is executed when 5 R time short circuit wins among the short time states is won) Set to

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there are both the first hold number based on the start winning at the first start opening 2002 and the second hold number based on the start winning at the second start opening 2004, The variable display of the second special symbol according to the second number of reservations is preferentially executed (the second number of reservations is prioritized over the first number of reservations). As described above, if the player continues to hit the ball in the short time state when the player wins the blowout chart, the probability that the game ball B can be accepted by the second start opening 2004 is high. In the short time state B, which is executed when a big hit is won, in most cases, the start winning to the second starting port 2004 occurs and the second special symbol variable display based on the start winning is executed finish.

  Next, the game nature in the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. Eight kinds of numerals [1] to [8] are adopted as a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, and a big hit symbol [ 111] [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888] are adopted. Further, 2/270 is defined as the winning probability of the big hit on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side. The probability of winning a small hit on the first special symbol side is 3/270, and the probability of winning a small hit on the second special symbol side is 113/270. As the winning probability per common drawing, 251/251 is defined. In addition, as the number of winning balls of the game ball B, three for the first starting opening 2002, one for the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005 and the second winning opening 2006 For each, 15 are defined. In addition, as the opening pattern A of the second start port 2004, an aspect is defined in which the state is maintained until 0.05 seconds have elapsed since the second start port 2004 is opened. On the other hand, as the opening pattern B of the second start port 2004, a mode is defined in which the state is maintained until 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the second start port 2004 is opened. Further, “one ball” is defined as the upper limit number of winnings which is a condition for the second start port 2004 to be in the closed state. In each round game of the big hit game, “1 time” is set as the number of times of opening of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006, and “10 balls” is set as the upper limit number of winnings. In the small hit game, “1 time” is defined as the number of opening times of the first large winning opening 2005, and “10 balls” is defined as the upper limit number of winnings.

  By the way, if the stopped special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened as a big hit game. Then, when the game ball B is received in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 when the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control A predetermined number of gaming balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the substrate 633. Therefore, by causing the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 to accept the game ball B when the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 is in the open state, many gaming balls B are It can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a small hit symbol, the first large winning opening 2005 is opened as a small hit game. Then, when the game ball B is received in the first big winning hole 2005 when the first big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number of gaming balls B from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 , Is dispensed to the upper plate 201. However, in the small hit game, the opening time of the first large winning opening 2005 is short, and the first large winning than the number of gaming balls B accepted in the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in the big hit game The number accepted by mouth 2005 is significantly less. As described above, in the small hit game, the number of game balls B paid out to the player is small, but during the small hit game, the game ball B entered into the first large winning opening 2005 and distributed by the distributing member A big hit game can be generated by being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, and the player can be entertained.

  Also, in this embodiment, 2/270 is set as the jackpot probability of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, and when the first special symbol side wins the jackpot, Since many of them (94%) are configured to be short-time hits at 5R, the big hit (the so-called first hit) on the first special symbol side in the normal game progression process (non-short time state) is short-time at 5R. There is a high possibility that a big hit will occur, and after the end of the big hit game pertaining to the 5R time short hit, the short time state B described above will occur. And, when it is controlled to the time saving state B after the end of the big hit game, when the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is fluctuated and displayed, plural to the second starting opening 2004 during the fluctuation display Each second game ball B is entered to increase the second hold number which is likely to lead to small hit game execution, and after the change display, the variable display according to the second hold number is executed and the small hit game is executed Hope that the gaming company will have hopes. In other words, even if the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed when it is controlled to the time saving state B after the end of the big hit game, the variation display time is first used to be small Run a stock game to increase (store) the second reserve number that is likely to lead to the per-game execution right, and digest the second reserve number that has been increased (stored) in the stock game after the fluctuation display to make a small hit game To realize a new game feature of executing a digestive game aiming to acquire the right to execute the game, and suppressing the decline in the game interest compared to the conventional game feature of merely waiting for the next big hit, regarding the successive occurrence of the big hit Is possible.

  Further, in order to more suitably realize the above-described game property, in the present embodiment, the progress control of the time saving state is controlled in a unique form. Specifically, in the short time state B, which is executed when the 5R time short time jackpot is won among the short time states, when the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed In order to finish the time saving state B after executing the variation display of the second special symbol only once, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variation time of 16 seconds. A plurality of start winnings to the second starting opening 2004 occur, and after the time saving state B ends, variable display based on the plurality of starting winnings is executed. That is, the variation display period of the second special symbol executed based on the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state B executed when winning in the 5R time shorts winning among the time saving state is , The opening and closing of the second start port 2004 is set long enough to be able to be executed a plurality of times, as a result, a period for generating a plurality of start winnings to the second start port 2004 (increasing the number of second holdings) It has become. Thereby, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B, using the time before and after the end of the short state B at that time, the above-mentioned "number of reserved second special symbols is stored and digested Game characteristics can be realized, and a decrease in amusement can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second hold number is zero in the short time state B which is executed when the 5R hour shorts win is won among the short time states (the second hold number is not stored). And, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the first number of reservations or the occurrence of a new start winning to the first starting opening 2002, the fluctuation display of the one first special symbol The time saving state B is to be continued after the one time variation display of the first special symbol without ending the time saving state B, and in the time shortening state B when the second special symbol variation display is not performed, the first It is configured to end the time saving state B after executing the variation display of the special symbol a maximum of five times. As a result, in the time saving state B executed when winning in the 5R time short winning state among the time saving states, there is no second pending number in the time saving state B, which is more disadvantageous than the case where the second special symbol variation display is executed The variation display of the special symbol is executed only once, and it is disadvantageous for the player compared with the case where the time saving state B is ended after the variation display of the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol is the first special symbol) Even though it is easier to win a small hit than this, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the player can not receive the right of one lottery for the second special symbol, etc.), and such a disadvantage occurs. It is possible to suppress the decline of the game interest due to something.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the variable display of the first special symbol is performed up to five times in the short state B when the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed, the time short state B is ended. Therefore, after the start of the time saving state B, the time saving state B continues even if all of the four reserved numbers of the first special symbol already stored are digested. Therefore, it is possible to experience the above-mentioned game characteristics even when leaving the seat after the start of the time saving state B, and it is possible not to give a disadvantage to the player due to leaving the seat.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed once, even if the variation display of the first special symbol has not reached five times, the variation of the one second special symbol The time saving state B is configured to end with the display. That is, one symbol variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state B also functions as a limiting means for forcibly terminating the time saving state B which may occur over a plurality of variable displays on the first special symbol side. Since the time saving state B is not long and it is possible to suppress excessive advantage for the player, it is possible to realize the above-mentioned game characteristics more suitably.

  In addition, in time saving state B executed when 5R time short winning is won among time saving states, the condition (number of times of time saving) which ends the time saving state B concerned is not restricted to the above-mentioned thing, At least the second special symbol For example, it may be configured to be able to perform variable display of the time, for example, it may be 2 times as the time reduction number of the first special symbol, 1 as the time reduction number of the second special symbol The number of changes in the second special symbol may be five, and may be two. In addition, as mentioned above, when functioning the variable display of the other special symbol as a limiting means for forcibly terminating the time shortening state which may occur over a plurality of times of the variable display on one special symbol side, the other side It is preferable to make the number of changes of the special symbol once.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the symbol variation of the first special symbol is executed five times or the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed once as the time saving state B after the end of the big hit game. Although it was configured to end, in addition, programming is performed so as to end the time saving state B by the combined variation number of symbol variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed five times after the end of the big hit game It is good also as setting. For example, in the case of adding the total variation number, when determining the end of the time saving state B, refer to the total variation number after the number of variations of the first special symbol single and the number of variations of the second special symbol single It can be illustrated that it comprises. By configuring in this way, the first and second special symbols change the programming from other gaming machines that do not differ from one another in the trigger for ending the time saving state, or the first and second special symbols cause the termination trigger from the time saving state. The symbol of the second special symbol, while making it possible to achieve commonality without requiring significant changes such as deletion or addition of program data relating to the total number of changes when changing programming to other gaming machines that do not differ. It is possible to realize the above-described game feature in which the time saving state ends when the change is performed once.

[8. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 118 (a) is a flow chart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs various processes as the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. It initializes data stored in a register and a RAM (hereinafter referred to as a main control built-in RAM) incorporated in the main control MPU. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to the operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal at the time of power on. When it is determined that the above-mentioned data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is executed to save information (for example, various flags etc.) indicating the progress of the game in the main control built-in RAM. Then, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the RAM clear switch is not operated, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Execute recovery processing to recover to the state according to the information. In addition, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is performed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 in the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the gaming state is controlled to the non-time-shortened state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) to be subjected to the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol Whether to make reach as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the fluctuation random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol Reach random numbers to be subjected to the lottery process whether or not to perform the effect, or symbol random numbers to be subjected to the lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (A first symbol random number, a second symbol random number), a random number (normal random number) to be provided for a lottery process according to a hit when the second start port 2004 is triggered, etc. And it includes a random number counter that.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is started, the second start opening 2004 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 mS.

  FIG. 118 (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2301, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, the second counting sensor 2513, the general winning opening sensor 3001, Detection signals from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 and the specific area sensor 2512 a are input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number counter (the special random number, the ordinary random number) related to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol among the random numbers is updated The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the special symbol as the process of step S14. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (a first special symbol process flag, a second that indicates the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM) The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the processing of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for a hit when the second start port 2004 is opened. Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

  Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. A command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like. Next, in step S17, a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process processing is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs information output processing for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer, for example, as processing of step S18.

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S19, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, and the second count sensor 2513. When the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the like are in the on state, the prize ball processing is executed to output the payout control command to the payout control board 633 so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. Do. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 so as to pay out the prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins in the first start opening 2002 and the first start opening sensor 3002 is turned on, "three balls", the game ball B wins in the second start opening 2004, and When the second starting hole sensor 2511 is turned on, "one ball", when the game ball B is won in the first large winning hole 2005 and the first count sensor 2512 is turned on, "15 balls", the second big prize When the game ball B wins in the mouth 2006 and the second count sensor 2513 is turned on "15 balls", when the game ball B wins in the general winning hole 2001 and the general winning hole sensor 3001 is turned on The player is to pay out the "8 ball" prize balls to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process of checking the increase and decrease of the number of pending storages as the process of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 119, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first receives the first start port sensor 3002 described above. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the on state (with the ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and incorporated into the main control The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2511 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2004 is entered) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number The second starting opening passage processing such as storing it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the big hit running flag indicating that it is controlling to the big hit game is set (step S35), if the big hit running flag is set, the control of the big hit game To execute the jackpot control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the result of the hit judgment and the contents of the big hit classification) suggests the "15R big hit" When the first large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that ten gaming balls B are won in the first large winning opening 2005 by the first count sensor 2512 Execute processing to control 15R big hit game which repeats opening and closing pattern to be closed 15 times when detected.

  Further, in the big hit control process, after performing such open control of the first big winning opening 2005, a time short flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that time saving control (control to be performed in a time saving state) is being executed, and is set when ending a big hit game based on a big hit that performs time saving control after the big hit game ends It is reset in the first special symbol stop process shown in 130 or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time-savings is set so as to end the time saving control when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed five times or when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed one time. That is, when the condition to execute time reduction control after the end of the big hit game and execute the variable display of the first special symbol five times or execute the variable display of the second special symbol once is established The time saving control is to be ended.

  Also, if the big hit running flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether a small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set or not (step S36), the small hit. If the in-execution flag is set, small hit control processing (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In addition, in the small hitting control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol becomes the mode which suggests "small hitting", When the second count sensor 2513 detects that 10 game balls B have won in the second large winning opening 2006 after opening the second large winning opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B Execute the process to close it. In addition, when the game ball B which is won in the second large winning opening 2006 and distributed by the distributing member enters the specific area, it is controlled to a big hit game and the first large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, After 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that ten gaming balls B have won at the first large winning opening 2005, it shifts to the 15R big hit game which repeats the open / close pattern to be closed 15 times Control. On the other hand, when the game ball B, which has won a prize in the first big winning opening 2005 and is distributed by the distributing member, enters the discharge area without entering the specific area, the game ball is not controlled to the big hit game and small After the end of the hit game, the game state (normal state or time saving state) before the small hit game is controlled again.

  Also, the main control MPU has a second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area if neither the big hit running flag nor the small hit running flag is set. The first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S38), on condition that the value of is “0” (step S37) On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S37), at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39).

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3002 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002, this is shown in FIG. 120. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S45 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S41. Store in

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the first special random number obtained in step S41, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the variable random number. Whether the jackpot is a big hit or not, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, or the reach type as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit After the effect pre-determination process of determining the prior determination information such as the type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning combination (step S45), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S43 to S45.

  In addition, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special number-of-retentions indicator in the function display unit 1400 is suspended for the first The command is updated so as to correspond to the number of memories, and a command (first number of pending designation commands 0 to 4) instructing the first number of pending storages is set in the above storage process (step S20) and sent to peripheral control board 1510 It is supposed to The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the first hold storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first hold number specification commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether it will be a big hit by comparing it with a random number, the type of big hit if it is big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it does not become a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

  Then, the identified prior determination information (whether or not to be a big hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or According to the type of game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of held memories (value of the held number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the pre-decision command. For example, in the effect prior determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified prior determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first pending storage number A first special symbol predetermination command according to one special suspension number counter value) is set (step S62).

  Then, by transmitting a priori determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), it is stored corresponding to the first starting opening 2002 where the start winning is generated. Whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the start winning combination is made a big hit or not, in the case of a big hit the type of big hit, if not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 executes Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting variable display according to the start winning combination, such as executing reach effect as the played game effect or the type type of the game effect to be executed Will be able to understand.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first holding storage area for storing prior determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

  Also, the first pending storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the pending storage number, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first (first) prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the prior determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the prior determination information notified to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area when the a priori determination command is received Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area according to the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (in the pending storage area Shift stored pre-decision information). Thereby, the prior determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information.

  As described above, when the variable display control is put on hold, although the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (pending), the jackpot expectation of the variable display control (pseudo-winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold termination. .

  FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2511 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, this is shown in FIG. 122. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. It is judged whether or not it is "4" (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Then, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S51. Store in

  On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of step S53 to step S54.

  In addition, when the number of second reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special number-of-retentions indicator in the function display unit 1400 is suspended second The command is updated so as to correspond to the number of storages, and a command (second number-of-holdings designation command 0 to 1) instructing the second number of pending storages is set in the above storage process (step S20) It is supposed to The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the second hold storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second hold number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, on the condition that an interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), one of the following five process processings according to the first special symbol process flag: It will be selectively executed. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. First special random symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is executed such as the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol. Normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )
3. Fluctuation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fluctuating random number, and fluctuation of the effect display executed corresponding to the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600 First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like for an aspect is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83)
5. The first special symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol

  The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 124, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the main control built-in RAM as processing of step S102. The same main control built-in RAM is the random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol Read from Then, next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) relating to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), and the start winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  Then, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big hit or the small hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process is ended.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the hit determination table and the special random number shown in FIG. 126 (A) (the first special random number read out in step S102 when the first special symbol normal processing is executed, If two special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special symbol (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 126 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is prepared for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table to be referred to for comparison with the first special random number, there are three types of coinciding with the big hit judgment value indicating that the two types of first special random numbers win the big hit, and different from the big hit judgment value. The first special random numbers respectively match the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has been won in the small hit, and the loss judgment value showing that the first special random number of 265 types is the loss. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 3/270). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table to be referred to for comparison with the second special random number, two types of second special random numbers are Matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot was won, matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the 113 second special random numbers different from the jackpot judgment value indicate that the jackpot is won for the small hit, and the 155 second special The second special random number is associated with each other so that the random number matches the loss determination value indicating that the loss is detected (big hit probability: 1/135, small hit probability: 113/270). That is, in the determination table referred to compare with the second special random number compared to the hit determination table referred to compare with the first special random number, the probability of being determined to be a small hit is configured to be higher When the second special symbol variation display based on the start winning combination to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the first special symbol variation display based on the starting winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 is executed One is in a state of being advantageous to the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the contact determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special special symbol read in the second special symbol normal processing As a result of the comparison with the random number), when it is determined to be a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the change is won as a big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination processing is ended.

  Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won in a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the reach determination table in the short time state to be used when the gaming state is the short state, and the non time short used when the gaming state is the short time state And a reach determination table at the time of state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the above reach is made such that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and the 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating no reach The random numbers are associated with one another.

  Further, the reach determination table in the non-time-short state matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-short state are reached, The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-time-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than that in the time-short state.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the change is determined to be the end of the reach (step S120). A reach flag indicating that a reach will be made is set, and the process is ended (step S121).

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first of all, as shown in FIG. 127. The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 126 (B), and the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is determined by comparing with the selected big hit symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 126 (B), in the big hit symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are respectively associated in accordance with the determination result (14R time short hit, 5R time short hit). It is memorized. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. Closed after the first large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 that ten gaming balls B have won in the first large winning opening 2005 The game ball B can enter the first large winning opening 2005 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds) to control the 14R big hit game (easy), and after the end of the big hit game, the symbol variation of the special symbol If the next big hit game does not occur within 100 times until it is executed, the state is ended and the time is ended.
2. Closed after the first large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 that ten gaming balls B have won in the first large winning opening 2005 The second count sensor is that after the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or ten gaming balls B are won in the second large winning opening 2006. The game ball B can enter the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 by repeating the open / close pattern to be closed when detected in 2513 four times (four rounds) Control and after the end of the big hit game, the next big hit game must occur between the time when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed one time. State end 5R time reduction jackpot A controlling the time reduction state B that
3. Closed after the second large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 2513 that ten gaming balls B have won in the second large winning opening 2006 The game ball B can enter the second large winning opening 2006 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds) to control the 14R big hit game (easy), and after the end of the big hit game, the symbol variation of the special symbol If the next big hit game does not occur within 100 times before being executed, the state is ended. When it is controlled to the short time state A 14R time short hit B
4. Closed after the first large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 that ten gaming balls B have won in the first large winning opening 2005 The second count sensor is that after the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or ten gaming balls B are won in the second large winning opening 2006. The game ball B can enter the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 by repeating the open / close pattern to be closed when detected in 2513 four times (four rounds) Control and after the end of the big hit game, the next big hit game must occur between the time when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed one time. State end 5R time reduction jackpot B controlling the time reduction state B that

  In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, six judgment values are distributed when 14R time minor hit A, and 94 judgment values are distributed when 5R minor time A There is. That is, when the lottery result of making a big hit is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, it will be 14 R time minor hit A with a probability of 6% and it will be 5 R hour minor hit A with a probability of 94%. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed in the case of 14R time minor hit B, and 42 judgment values in the case of 5R hour minority B ing. That is, when a lottery result of making a big hit is obtained by the lottery based on the second special random number, it will be a 14 R time short hit B with a probability of 58% and a 5 R time short hit B with a probability of 42%. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability of being determined as a 14 R time jackpot is high in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared to the big hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the second special symbol variation display based on the start winning combination to the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 It is in an advantageous state for the player.

  In addition, when a lottery result of being a big hit is obtained, the gaming state after the big hit game is ended is determined according to the type of big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after performing control of the big hit game, the process of setting the time-shortening flag based on the determination result and the process of setting the time-shortening count according to the type of the big hit to the time-shortening counter To be executed.

  Specifically, when it is determined that a big hit of "14R hour minor hit A" and "14R hour minor hit B" has been obtained, a special symbol (first special symbol after a big hit game for 14 rounds is executed When it is determined that the big fluctuation of "5R time minor hit A" and "5 R hour minor hit B" is controlled until the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed 100 times. After five rounds of big hit games are executed, the first special symbol is controlled five times, or the second special symbol is displayed one time, until the variable display is executed one time. As described above, when the lottery result of the big hit is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, it is controlled to be in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the lottery result similarly made to the big hit by the lottery based on the second special random number Even when the player gets a big hit, he or she is supposed to control the time saving mode after the end of the big hit game. However, when a big hit of "14R hour shorts A" and "14R time shorts B" is obtained, "5R hours shorts A" and "5R time shorts B" is a big hit game than when a big hit is obtained After execution, it is controlled to be in a short time state for a long time.

  In addition, if it is decided that 14R hour shorts A is decided as 14R big hit symbol of the first special symbol, it is decided to be 14R hour shorts A symbol, and if decided to be 5R hour shorts A, it is 5R as 5R big hit symbol of the first special symbol Decide to the time A big hit A symbol. Also, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing is determined to be 14R hour big hit B, it is determined to be the 14R big hit symbol of the second special symbol 14R hour big and large hit B symbol, and if it is decided to be 5R hour short big B As a 5R jackpot symbol of two special symbols, it is decided to be a 5R hour minor hit B symbol.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the above-described lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) as the processing of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may indicate the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, this process is ended.

  The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of variation stop of the decorative symbol, the peripheral control MPU identifies a big hit from the received judgment result notification command as a big hit symbol (left, middle and right decorative symbols are displayed). The same symbol combination [0] to [8] is determined, and if reach reach is specified, the lost symbol with reach (the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbols of [0] to [8] When it is decided to be a combination of symbols different in the inside decorative symbol; reach lost symbol) and a loss is identified, the lost symbol without reach (at least the left, right or left among the decorative symbols on the left, middle and right Is determined to be a combination of different decorative symbols), and the display of the determined stop symbol is controlled when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (when the game effect is ended).

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is If it is set (step S145), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal loss (reach effect Change pattern table (not shown) in case of loss Is selected (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Thus, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. The presentation control will be performed.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, among the 241 types of fluctuating random numbers, 164 types of fluctuating random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of fluctuating random numbers are super reach A judgment value (223 to 240) which is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is to be executed, and indicates that 18 kinds of fluctuating random numbers are to execute any of the super reach effects having a high hit probability. Set as). In addition, with super reach production, big hit expectation degree is higher than normal reach production, for the player who desires the occurrence of the big hit game when the super reach production is executed the expectation of the player for the big hit game increases It has become.

  In the fluctuation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds are set in the non-time-short state and 4 to 60 seconds in the time-short state as the fluctuation time corresponding to the first special random number. As the corresponding fluctuation time, 13 to 60 seconds are set in the non-time-short state, and 2 to 60 seconds are set in the time-short state.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is then determined as the process of step S151 whether or not the count value of the hour counter is "0". Then, if the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time counter (step S152), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is "0" (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is to be ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not "0", Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 129, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S84) in the process of step S173, this process is ended.

  FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 130, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. The display control for causing the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing as the processing of the first special symbol stop processing A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of one special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, when the time reduction end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction end flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185). In this way, when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 1 time, or 5 times), the time saving control is ended. It will start control of the non-short time state.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is to be started (step S187). The standby time until start (time to display a message to start the big hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit to the big hit counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The big hit counter is decremented by 1 each time the round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified round number. Control to end the big hit game. Specifically, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the big winning opening opening processing (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hitting counter becomes “0” in the big hitting control processing described later, and the big winning winning The big hit number opening post-processing (step S93) is executed based on the big hit number counter being decremented by 1 when ending the round in the open mouth process (step S92) and the big hit game ends Execute control.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that a big hit game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (14 R time short hit A start command, 5 R time short hit A start command) according to the type of big hit (14R time short hit A, 5R time short hit A) is set. As a result, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. In the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process processing, the big hit start command (14 R time short hit B start command, 5 R time short hit B start according to the type of big hit (14 R time short hit B, 5 R time short hit B) Command) is set.

  In addition, the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game is under execution, when the big hit game ends, specifically, the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S93) of the big hit control processing (step S40) the big hit Opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example after opening the first large winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds) or 10 game balls B winning in the first large winning opening 2005 It is reset (all rounds that can be performed in the big hit game) when the open / close control of repeating the open / close pattern to be closed 14 times or 5 times to be closed when detected by the first count sensor 2512 is ended. While the big hit control process (step S40) is not performed in step S35 of the special symbol process processing (step S14) by resetting the big hit execution flag, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 The variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol display of the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be performed.

  Also, when the big hit flag is not set (step S186), if the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game The small hit start command is set (step S191), and the standby time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying the small hit game etc. is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of the small hit. In step S191, a small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit according to the small hit type (5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A)) Set A start command). Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, small hit start command (5R small hit B1 according to the type of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B)) The start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command) is set.

  Also, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically the small hit middle processing (step S401) of the small hit control processing (step S41) described later. The opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2005 according to the type of small hit (for example, after opening the first large winning opening 2005 (for example 1.8 seconds) or the game ball B 10 in the first large winning opening 2005 It is reset when the opening / closing control to close when the individual winning is detected by the first count sensor 2512 is finished. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 The first special symbol variation display in the bowl and the second special symbol variation display in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be performed.

  Also, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it is lost, set the interval timer to the waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) before starting the next variable display of the special symbol. (Step S194), it transfers to step S195.

  When the processing of the step S186 to step S194 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so as to be process transition to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value At step S195, the process ends.

    FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes will be selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game is to be transferred to the big hit game based on the fact that the variation display stop mode of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a big hit symbol. Processing to be performed by the player, or waiting for the next round to be started (step S91)
2. Based on the fact that the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to the open state based on the mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the special symbol becoming the big hit design, or the next round is started Control the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 to the open state and open the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or A process for opening a special winning opening that is closed when it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 or the second count sensor 2513 that ten game balls B have won in the large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 (step S92)
3. When the notification to the player that the big hit game is over is finished by the peripheral control board 1510 when all rounds are finished, the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S93)

  The big hit process flag is operated to indicate that the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118). Also, in the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing (step S92), at the start of the round to control the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 to the open state, the big hit round start command according to the number of rounds At the end of a round to set and control the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 in a closed state, a big hit round end command according to the number of rounds is set. In addition, the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the production of the big hit game according to the number of rounds instructed by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command is displayed The apparatus 1600 is implemented by a lamp, an LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed depending on the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing which executes setting processing in order to start small hit game (step S400)
2. During a small hit during the small hit game processing to monitor the entering and opening time of the game ball B (step S401)

  The small hit process flag is manipulated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118). In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small hitting medium processing, the big hit execution flag is set, the round number which can be executed in the big hit game according to the kind of the small hit (5R small If it is a hit, 4 rounds, if it is a 14R small hit, 13 rounds) is set in the big hit counter and the process is ended. Thereby, the big hit game will be started following the small hit game.

  FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 133, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs gate part passing processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol hold storage area of the RAM as the processing of step S802. Run.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU, and the normal symbol normal processing in which the lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Normal symbol variation pattern determination processing in which lottery processing etc. for the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the common pattern variation random number (step S804)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)
4. The pattern of the normal symbol at the time of the fluctuation control stop determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display pattern at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Normal symbol stop processing to stop the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests "per common figure", the process which controls the acceptance of game ball B to the 2nd starting opening 2004 above is controlled Ordinary motor combination processing to be executed (step S 807)

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 described above (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S802).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 134, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires, from the RAM of the main control MPU, a counter value by the normal hold number counter indicating the number of ordinary random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage area as the process of step S811. . And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of pending storages of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the variation display control of the normal symbol into the pending state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of the step S812, the normal number-of-holds counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-mode fluctuation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S814, each random number acquired in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the memory areas of the RAM of the main control MPU.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the process of step S812 to step S814 (do not acquire the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common drawing fluctuation random number from the above-mentioned random number counter), fluctuation display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put into the suspension state.

  The gate part passing process (step S802) may be another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The normal random number and the common variable random number are obtained from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above normal number-of-holds counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value it is judged whether the number of storages reserved for normal symbols is "4" which is its maximum value. Do. And when it is judged that the number of pending storages of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not the maximum value, the above-mentioned ordinary pending number counter is counted up (one increment) in order to make the fluctuation display control of the above ordinary symbol newly pending. Then, the above-mentioned ordinary random number acquired previously, the above-mentioned common drawing fluctuation random number (the above-mentioned ordinary random number stored in the temporary storage area, the above common drawing fluctuation random number) Is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the above normal hold number counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value is "4", which is the maximum value, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the above normal pending number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU In the case of the maximum value), the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the common drawing fluctuation random number acquired earlier are discarded without storing them in the ordinary symbol storage area, and the fluctuation display control of the acquired ordinary symbol is newly made. It may be made not to be put on hold.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing in step S821. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, next, as the processing of step S822, the ordinary stored in the normal symbol suspension storage area of the main control MPU RAM The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, while counting down the above-mentioned normal number-of-holds counter, at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the above-mentioned normal symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary storage area The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 is from the first (first) area Store in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area Is stored, and when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage The various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the determination table per common drawing shown in FIG. 136A with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

  The per-diagram determination table shown in FIG. 136 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the determination table per common drawing to be compared with the normal random numbers, the above-mentioned normal random number is matched with the common judgment value per common drawing indicating that all 10 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common drawing. It is associated. That is, in the present example, when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is always elected per common drawing.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the determination table for common drawing with the ordinary random number read in step S 822 of the normal symbol normal processing, if it determines that it is per common drawing (step S 829), A flag per common drawing indicating that the change is won per common drawing is set (step S 830), and a symbol per common drawing is determined as a mode (stop symbol of normal design) at the time of change control stop of the normal design (Step S831). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S829 that a common drawing is not determined, a common drawing missing symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of a normal design) at the time of variation control stop of the normal symbol (step S833).

  Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbol is performed in this way, the lottery result is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S 834 such that the lottery result (indicating either per common drawing or lost) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. A common drawing determination result notification command corresponding to each result is set. After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation pattern determination processing (step S804) as the processing of step S835, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the time-shortening flag set. If it is (step S841), the regular symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of short time is selected (step S842), and if the time saving flag is set (step S841), the regular symbol variation pattern determination table at the non-short time is selected (Step S843).

  Then, the variation pattern (common figure variation pattern) of the normal symbol to be executed is determined by comparing the selected normal symbol variation pattern determination table with the common figure variation random numbers read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S844) ), Set the common pattern fluctuation pattern command to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal symbol fluctuation in the determined common pattern fluctuation pattern, and display the normal symbol fluctuation displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (Step S845).

  Further, when determining the common drawing fluctuation pattern, the main control MPU sets the common drawing fluctuation time according to the determined common drawing fluctuation pattern in the common drawing fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed by the normal symbol display (the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the function display unit 1400) for the common drawing fluctuation time according to the determined common drawing fluctuation pattern.

  Further, in the non-time-short normal symbol variation pattern determination table of this example, 20 seconds is set as the common drawing variation time. On the other hand, in the regular symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of a short time of this example, 0.8 seconds as a regular diagram variation time so that the common diagram variation time will be short compared to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the non-short time Is set. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  In addition, when the variation display control of the normal symbol is started, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation processing (step S805) as the processing of step S847 next End the process.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing in step S851. The common drawing fluctuation timer for which the common drawing fluctuation time is set in the step S846 is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the common drawing fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time of the above-mentioned normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, at the time of updating the normal symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop processing (step S806) in the processing of step S853, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stopping process (step S806).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 139, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing in step S861. The display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol normal processing on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. The normal drawing stop display command to be set is set as the command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S 862).

  Then, next, when the flag for the common drawing is set (step S863), using the open pattern table for the common drawing shown in FIG. 136 (B), the second starting opening according to the current gaming state The open pattern of 2004 is set (step S864).

  Specifically, if it is controlled to be in a non-time-short state at the start of opening of the second start port 2004, the open pattern A is set as the open pattern of the second start port 2004. That is, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-short state at the start of opening, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed when the drawing result per common drawing is obtained by the drawing based on the ordinary random number. An opening pattern A in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is performed with the starting port solenoid 2514 turned on. As a result, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second start opening 2004, the time for which the second start opening 2004 is open is short, and the game ball is open when the second start opening 2004 is in the open state. It is difficult to enter the ball. That is, in the non-time-short state, even if the second start port 2004 is opened and closed, the game ball hardly enters the ball.

  On the other hand, if it is controlled to be in the short time state at the start of opening the second start port 2004, the open pattern B is set as the open pattern of the second start port 2004. That is, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-short state at the start of opening, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed when the drawing result per common drawing is obtained by the drawing based on the ordinary random number. The opening pattern B in which the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is executed with the starting port solenoid 2514 turned on. Thereby, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second start opening 2004, the time when the second start opening 2004 is open operation is long, and the game ball is open when the second start opening 2004 is in the open state Can enter the ball.

  When the opening pattern of the second start port 2004 is set, next, in step S885, a start command per common drawing indicating that the game per common drawing is to be started is set, and a normal symbol process flag When the process is updated to release the process (step S866), the process ends. Note that the start command per common drawing is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display game per common drawing according to the type per common drawing instructed by the start command per common drawing is the effect display device 1600, It can be implemented by a lamp, an LED, a speaker or the like.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has updated the normal symbol process flag so that the process can be shifted to the normal symbol normal processing, which is the initial value, when the flag per common drawing is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

  FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary motor-operated part open process (step S807).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 140, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control board 1310 is If the control MPU controls the second start port 2004 to be in the open state, if the predetermined time (the open time of the second start port 2004 in the open pattern set in step S865) has elapsed (step S872), the second When the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the start port 2004 is turned off and the second start port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the second start port 2004. (Step S874), when the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second start port 2004 is turned on to control the second start port 2004 to the open state (step S875), End the process.

  Also, in the process of step S 871, if it is not the timing to open the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second start port 2004. When the number of times becomes a predetermined number of times (the number of times of opening of the second start port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), a per-chart normal drawing end command is set (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the normal symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S878), this processing is ended. It should be noted that the end command per drawing is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the end command per drawing, and the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can end.

[9. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 141, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes 2 mS steady processing. In the 2mS steady-state process, a process to count up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16mS elapsed While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapse flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in 2 mS steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker and the like is executed based on a command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, when the 16 mS lapse flag T is not set in step S502 (16 mS lapse flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS lapse flag T is set.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart of an example of 16 mS steady-state processing performed every 16 mS in the sub main processing. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Control processing relating to the effect display device 1600 is executed based on that.

  Moreover, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process regarding the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting lighting signals of lamps and LEDs to various decoration substrates 184, 273 and the like is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady process ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more by the end of the 16 mS steady process after the 16 mS steady process starts, the 16 mS steady process immediately after the 16 mS steady process starts (command from step S601) Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16mS has elapsed during execution of the 16mS steady process, only the 16mS elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16mS steady process is completed, the 16mS steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub main processing and the 16 mS steady processing.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 It will be done.

1. Fluctuation pattern command that indicates fluctuation pattern of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the above command analysis process (first fluctuation pattern command that indicates fluctuation pattern of first special symbol, second After performing processing to control the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker, etc. based on the second change pattern command instructing the change pattern of the special symbol, etc. Change production start process to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time since the control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921 and the like is started is measured, and processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time. In-process variation process (step S712) that changes the above-mentioned presentation process flag to a value according to the variation end process according to the variation time according to the variation pattern of one special symbol and the second special symbol).
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result is performed based on the reception of a stop display command instructing a variable display stop of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if it is a loss, the above-mentioned effect Change the process flag to a value according to the change production start process, change it to a value according to the big hit production process if it is a big hit, change it to a value according to the small hit production process if it is a small hit (Step S713)
4. The effect display device 1600 performs processing to execute display control during the big hit game based on the reception of the big hit start command instructing start of the big hit game, and the above-mentioned process flag is changed when the big hit game is ended. Big hit effect processing to change to the value according to the effect start processing (step S714)
5. The effect display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during the small hit game based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing start of the small hit game, and the second large winning opening during the small hit game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to the specific area, when the small hit game is ended, the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit effect start processing, and the game ball B is allocated to the specific area If it is not, the small hitting effect processing which changes to the value which responds to fluctuation production start processing (step S715)

  Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator of function display unit 1400, second special symbol indicator of function display unit 1400) by the above processing The fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is executed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the fluctuation display of.

[10. Variation control at the end of time saving control]
As described above, in the short time state, the opening and closing control of the second start port 2004 is performed with an open pattern different from the short time state. That is, when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 stops, if it is a short time state, the second start opening 2004 with the opening pattern A of the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) The second open pattern B of the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) if the non-time-short state is stopped when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is closed. The start port 2004 is to be opened and closed.

  In this manner, immediately after the time saving state ends (for example, the number of time reductions) in order to change the opening pattern of the second start port 2004 based on the time when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 stops. In the case of 100 short time status A, the normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 on the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) immediately before the 100th variable display stops in the time short status A When the normal symbol variation executed in is stopped and the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed with the opening pattern B of the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as a short time state. It will be done. In addition, when the time saving state ends after the opening of the second start port 2004, the player may feel discomfort because the opening pattern in the time saving state is executed although the time saving state is ended. In addition, the start winning to the second start opening 2004 may occur at an unexpected time such as after the symbol variation is started in the non-time-short state after the end of the time-short state, this is not intended by the game designer Behavior (In the non-time-short state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the variable-display of the second special symbol is hardly performed, but to the second starting opening 2004 despite the non-time-short state The game proceeds with the occurrence of the start winnings and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner), and the behavior gives the player a sense of discomfort, which may lower the fun of the game.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when stopping the special symbol variably displayed by the special symbol indicator (the first special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 (for example, the first symbol) One special symbol stop processing step S194), usually, "0.5 seconds" to the interval timer as a waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) before starting the next variation display of the special symbol set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process process (step S28) and the second special symbol process process (step S39), and the special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 (the first until the interval timer times out) Control is performed so that the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in one special symbol display, second special symbol display) is not started.

  In addition, when ending the time saving state, that is, when the symbol variation of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) after the big hit game has reached the time shortening number of times, when the symbol variation stops (time delay When the last symbol change in the state is stopped), "2 seconds" is given to the interval timer as the waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variation display of the special symbol is started. set. As described above, in the short time state, after changing the second start port 2004 to the open state, the second start port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, by setting "2 seconds" in the interval timer when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and ends the time saving state, the symbol variation of the special symbol in the non-time short status is started before it starts The second start port 2004 can be changed to the closed state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the start winning for the second start port 2004 after the symbol variation of the special symbol in the non-short time state is started.

  In addition, the period set to an interval timer when the last symbol change in time saving state stops and ends time saving state is equivalent to the opening time of the 2nd big winning a prize mouth 2006 at least in time saving state (in this example “1. It may be 5 seconds or more. In addition, when the second symbol winning port 2006 does not change to the open state when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and ends the time saving state, as a standby time until the next time the variable display of the special symbol starts A time similar to the normal time ("0.5 seconds" in this example) may be set.

  Thus, when the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (when the last symbol change in the time saving state is stopped), in the predetermined period regardless of the presence or absence of the first holding number and the second holding number By suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (fall determination), time reduction control may be continued after the last special drawing result in the time reduction state is derived (after the last symbol variation in the time reduction state is stopped) Can be ended within the predetermined period, and an increase in the second number of reservations can be suppressed after the end of the time saving control. As a result, the game proceeds with the unintended behavior of the game designer that the start winning at the second start port 2004 occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed despite the non-short time state. It is possible to prevent the game progression in the behavior intended by the game designer (game characteristics intended by the game designer), so that a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed by giving the player no sense of discomfort. .

  In the above-mentioned example, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 has stopped determining whether or not the time saving state (determination of whether to end the time saving state). Although what was performed as a standard was shown, when starting the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to determine whether or not it is a short time condition (for example, the above normal symbol normal processing (step S803) Or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is executed). In this case, at least the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time saving state (general figure variation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example) and the time shortening state It may be equal to or longer than a period obtained by adding the opening time of the second large winning opening 2006 (in this example, “1.5 seconds”) or more (in this example, “2.3 seconds”).

[11. Hold notice effect and hold change effect]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number specification command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the display mode of the hold display until the hold display is digested. By changing, it is possible to execute a suspension announcement effect that suggests a big hit expectation for the variation display (the variation display of the special symbol) of the decorative symbol based on the suspension display. Moreover, during the display period of a pending | holding display, it is possible to perform pending | holding change presentation which suggests the possibility that the display mode of a pending | holding display may change.

  Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), the main control board 1310 transmits a hold number designation command and an advance determination command. . When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the hold number specification command and the advance determination command in the command analysis process of step S601, the hold notification number determined from the hold notification determination table according to those commands, that is, the hold number specification command Select the pending notice decision table corresponding to (number of pending storages) and the prior decision information (big hit, small hit, reach loss, lost) specified from the prior decision command, and the decision set in the pending notice decision table By comparing the value with the read random number for holding notice determination, the type of the holding notice pattern set in the holding notice determination table is determined. In the hold notice setting table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold notice pattern differs for each of the prior determination information (big hit, small hit, reach loss, loss) specified from the pre-determination command, and each hold The appearance rate of the advance notice pattern is different.

  In addition, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), the number of holdings (holding memory number) specified from the holding number designating command is increased, thereby displaying the effect The device 1600 additionally displays one pending indication. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold display (the variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holdings (the number of holding memories) specified from the holding number specification command decreases. , Erase the pending display in the effect display device 1600. Then, during the display period from when the on-hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to when the on-hold display is erased, the display mode of the on-hold display is displayed based on the on-hold notification pattern. The display mode of the hold display can be changed each time the variable display (the change display of the special symbol) of the decorative symbol based on another hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied). In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold display (the variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted. Even after the start of the change display (the change display of the special symbol), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changed. In such a case, before and after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the suspension display (the variation display of the special symbol), the position at which the suspension display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 is moved as in the other suspension display. It is also possible to suggest that the display mode of the on-hold display may change due to the execution of on-hold change effects (on-hold movement change effects, counter-on-hold change effects, billiard on-off change effects) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, a description will be given of the hold notification setting table in which a plurality of hold notification patterns are set for each hold number (hold memory number) specified from the hold number specification command. Note that the hold advance notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 144 (A) is a pending notice determination table used when pending 1 is lit (number of pendings = 1), and FIG. 144 (B) is a pending notice determination used when pending 2 is on (number of pendings = 2) It is a table, and FIG. 144 (C) is a pending notice determination table used when pending 3 lights on (number of pendings = 3), and FIG. 145 (D) is used when pending 4 lights on (number of pendings = 4) It is a reservation notice determination table to be performed.

  As described above, a plurality of types of pending notification patterns are set in the pending notification determination table corresponding to the number of pending (the number of pending storages), but the number of pending statuses for winning (for pending notification patterns) It is set how the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 changes each time the hold storage is digested by the number of storages). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 may change in the hold notification setting table used when the hold 1 is on (number of holds = 1). Otherwise (that is, it only digests the hold indication), a hold notification pattern is set in which only the display mode of one hold indication is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), the display mode of the hold display can be changed once before the hold display is digested, in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 2 is on (number of holds = 2). Since there exists, the pending notice pattern in which the display mode of two pending displays is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), the display mode of the hold display can be changed twice before the hold display is digested in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 3 is on (number of holds = 3). Since there exists, the pending notice pattern in which the display mode of the pending display for 3 times is set is associated. Also, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), the display mode of the hold display can be changed three times before the hold display is digested in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 4 is on (number of holds = 4). From the fact that there is a hold notification pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for 4 times is set is associated.

  In addition, as a display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 set to the hold notification pattern, four displays such that the hold display is displayed in white (basic color), blue, red, or rainbow color Aspects are provided. Then, when determining the suspension notice pattern from the suspension notice determination table, as a result of the display mode of the suspension display changing to the end, the big hit expectation is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color It is set to become. That is, when the lottery result is identified as the big hit as the prior determination information, the pending notice pattern to be a display mode (for example, rainbow color) having a high hit probability is determined as the display mode of the final pending display. When the lottery result is specified as loss (losing, reach loss) as the determination information, as the display mode of the final hold display, the hold notification pattern to be a display mode (for example, white) with low big hit expectation degree is determined with high probability From the above, when the display mode of the final hold display is displayed in the display mode with a high hit probability, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased.

  In addition, the display mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → red → rainbow color in the reserve notification pattern, and the display mode of the reserve display is maintained when the reserve display is digested. Or, the next display mode is set to be a display mode having a high hit probability. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low hit probability, the possibility of changing to a display mode with a high hit probability when the hold display is digested remains, and the display of the hold display Aspects can be watched with expectation to the end.

  Moreover, the display mode of the hold display does not necessarily need to change in the order of blue → red → rainbow color after the display mode of the hold display is displayed in white (basic color) in the reserve notification pattern, and display in the middle of not white (basic color) Start from the mode (for example, suddenly with a suspension notice pattern number 4 when hold 1 lights on, and start with rainbow color) or skip one or more display modes and change to the next display mode (for example, when hold 2 lights on) It is also set to change from white (basic color) to rainbow color) according to the reservation notice pattern number 7 of. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) in which the display mode of the hold display changes, it is possible to display the display mode of the hold display in a display mode with a high hit probability. In addition, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low hit probability, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode changes to, and the display mode of the hold display is to the end It can be made to pay attention with expectation.

  Also, in the pending notice determination table, a pending notice pattern that becomes rainbow color as a display mode of the final pending display only when a big hit is identified as the prior decision information from the prior decision command 4. Pending notice pattern number 4, 7, 9, 10 when Pending 2 lights up, Pending notice pattern number 4, 7 when Pending 3 lights, etc. Is set to be possible. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is digested, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. .

  In addition, when a loss is identified as prior determination information from the prior determination command in the suspension notice determination table, a suspension notice pattern (white 1 (basic color) or blue) will be displayed as the display mode of the final suspension display Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, Hold notice 2 hold hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, etc. Hold 3 turn on hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, etc. Hold 4 turn on hold notice pattern numbers 1, 2 etc.) If the big hit, small hit, or reach is specified as the pre-judgment information from the pre-judgment command while deciding the pre-judgment command, the hold notification pattern that turns red as the display mode of the final hold display Hold notice pattern number 3, 6, 8 when hold 2 lights on, hold notice pattern number 3, 6, etc. when hold 3 lights, etc. hold notice pattern when hold 4 lights on It is set to be able to determine the number 3,6, etc.). For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in red, it is determined that at least reach at the time of digesting the hold display and the reach effect is executed, and the player's expectation for the big hit game and the small hit game Is getting higher.

  In the present embodiment, by determining the hold notification pattern at the start of display of the hold display, a series of contents in which the display mode of the hold display changes until the hold display is digested is determined. However, as the determination method, only the display mode of the hold display at the start time and the display mode of the final hold display may be determined at the start of the display of the hold display. And when the display mode of the hold display at the start time and the display mode of the final hold display are different, the display mode of the final hold display before at least the target hold display is digested. It is also possible to determine how the display mode of the hold display changes, each time when the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can be changed comes, so that is displayed. Even with such a determination method, it is possible to sequentially change the display mode of the hold display until the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is digested.

  Next, the pending change presentation that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the pending display changes during the pending display period will be described below. In the suspension notice effect mentioned above, the display mode of the suspension display can be changed every time the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the suspension display. At the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed, it is possible to execute a hold change presentation that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change.

  Specifically, whether the display mode of the hold display changes based on the hold notification pattern at the time of starting the change display (the change display of the special symbol) of the decorative symbol on the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the start condition is satisfied) It is judged whether or not it is not, the holding change presentation determination table corresponding to the judgment result is selected, and the judgment value set in the holding presentation change decision table is compared with the read random number for holding presentation changing decision, The type of the on-hold change effect pattern set in the on-hold change effect determination table is determined. That is, whether or not to execute the on-hold change effect, and when performing on-off change effect, determine the type of the on-hold change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of hold change effect patterns are set in the hold change effect determination table, and a hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern No. 1) for which the hold change effect is not executed, Hold change effect pattern to execute hold movement change effect as hold change effect (hold change effect pattern No. 2), hold change effect pattern to execute hold change effect as hold change effect (hold change effect pattern No. 3), hold change As the effect, the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern No. 4) for executing the billiard on-hold change effect is set. The hold change presentation determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. In the hold change production determination table, the distribution of the determination value for each of the hold change production patterns (hold change production pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change production is the same degree, and the appearance rate of each hold change production Although the distribution of the determination values may be made different, the appearance rate of each of the pending change effects may be made different.

  Further, in the on-hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the on-hold display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the on-hold change effect On the other hand, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change, most of the judgments are made on the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) not executing the hold change effect Values are distributed. As described above, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the hold change effect is always executed, and when the hold change effect is performed, the display mode of the hold display changes with high probability. Thus, it can be expected to pay attention to whether the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold change presentation.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit is four as the number of reservations (number of storages reserved), but the number of suspension displays corresponding to the number of reservations can be displayed at the four corners of the rectangular display area in the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the hold display is displayed at the lower left position of the display area when the hold 1 (hold number = 1) lights, and is held at the lower right position of the display area when the hold 2 (hold number = 2) lights. The display is displayed, and the hold display is displayed at the upper right position of the display area when the hold 3 (number of hold = 3) lights up, and is held at the upper left position of the display area when the hold 4 (number of hold = 4) lights Display is displayed. Also, in principle, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display of the hold 1 displayed at the lower left position of the display area is erased Along with that, the hold display of the other hold 2 to 4 is to move clockwise as it is displayed in the display area.

  First, in the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern No. 1) in which the on-hold change effect is not executed, when the on-hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, after moving from the position before the move It is designed to move linearly at the shortest distance to the position of.

  Also, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern No. 2) in which the hold movement change effect is executed as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved, Unlike the case where the hold change effect is not performed from the position of to the position after movement, the movement is performed in a non-linear manner, and the hold display is performed during the movement (before the position after movement is reached) The display mode of can be changed. In addition, when executing the on hold movement change presentation, compared to the case where the on hold display moves linearly (when the on hold change presentation is not performed), during the period until the on hold display reaches the position after movement, The display mode of the hold display is highly likely to change. Moreover, in the on-hold movement change effect, plural types of effect patterns are provided in which the mode in which the on-hold display moves is different from the case where the on-hold change effect is not executed, and the on-hold display moves linearly (on-hold change effect The longer the moving distance is, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the present embodiment, the longer the distance the holding display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the holding display changes. However, as another example, regardless of the distance the holding display moves, it looks like As the manner in which the hold display moves is more complicated (for example, the number of times the travel path of the hold display intersects is more frequent), the display manner of the hold display may be more likely to change. Also, as another example of the pending movement change effect, the longer the distance the pending display moves, the higher the possibility that the pending display mode changes to a display mode with a high hit probability (for example, rainbow color). It may be set.

  Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern No. 3) in which the hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved, The hold display moves from the position to the outside of the display area and is temporarily erased, and after a predetermined time passes, the hold display returns to the display area and arrives at the position after movement, and the point at which the hold display returns , The display mode of the hold display can be changed. In addition, when executing hold back change effect, compared with the case where the hold change effect is not executed (when the hold display is not erased outside the display area and moves linearly), the position after the hold display is moved. It is highly likely that the display mode of the hold display changes in the period until it reaches. Further, in the countering change change effect, a plurality of effect patterns are provided outside the display area in which the time for which the hold display is erased is different, and the display mode of the hold display may change as the time for the erase is longer. Sex is high. In addition, as another example of the countering holding change effect, the display mode of the holding display may change to a display mode (for example, rainbow color) having a high hit probability as the time for which the holding display is erased outside the display area is long. May be set to be high.

  In addition, in the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern No. 4) which executes billiard on-off change effect as on-off change effect, the on-off display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves to the billiard ball A similar ball display appears in a predetermined display mode, and after the ball display bounces in the display area multiple times, the ball display collides with the hold display at the position after movement, the ball display Is a new hold display, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed to the display mode of the ball display depending on whether or not the ball display collides. That is, when the billiard hold change presentation is not performed, the ball display does not appear, and the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold display reaches the position after movement, while the billiard hold change presentation In the case of execution, the ball display appears, and it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display after the hold display reaches the position after movement. In addition, when the billiards hold change presentation is performed, the hold display moves as a result of moving as compared with the case where the hold change presentation is not performed (the hold display moves linearly and the ball display does not appear). The possibility of changing the display mode of the display is high. In the present embodiment, even when another effect display (effect display with change display of the decorative symbol based on the change pattern) is different from the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, It is possible to execute the same effect as the billiard hold change effect. Specifically, when a ball display resembling a billiard ball appears in a predetermined display mode, and the ball display collides with the effect display after the ball display bounces a plurality of times in the display area, The effect display changes. Therefore, even if the ball display does not collide with the hold display, it can be expected to pay attention to whether the effect display changes due to the collision with the effect display.

  In the present embodiment, the on-hold notice effect and the on-hold change effect are performed in the non-time-short state. In the non-time-short state, the second special symbol-side retention memory based on the entry of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2004 hardly occurs, and based on the entering of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2002 Since the first special symbol side holding storage can be generated, only the holding display based on the first special symbol holding memory is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, in the non-time-short state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area where the effect display is performed with the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the fluctuation pattern, and the first It is divided into a pending display area where a pending display corresponding to the number of pending storages on the special symbol side is performed. Specifically, the symbol display area is reduced to about 80% of the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the non-time-short state, the hold display area is divided and provided, so that the hold display displayed in the hold display area can be made conspicuous, and the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold notification effect. It is easy to pay attention to whether or not to. In the non-time saving state, the probability of winning for a big hit or a small hit is low, and it is difficult to expect for the variation display or effect display of the decorative symbol performed in the symbol display area, but the display is on the hold display area Since the on-hold display to be displayed is made to stand out, it can be expected that the display mode of the on-hold display will change, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the on-hold notice effect and the on-hold change effect are performed during normal change which is a stage of whether or not the reach state is formed at the time of the change display of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the holding change effect is not executed, the symbol display area remains reduced to about 80% of the display area, whereas when the holding change effect is executed, the display area is further 60% The symbol display area is reduced to some extent. In this way, with the symbol display area changing from about 80% to about 60% of the display area, the hold change effect is performed on the hold display displayed in the hold display area, so the symbol display area Can be made to pay attention to the holding change effect being performed for the holding display. In addition, when the hold change effect is executed, the hold display area is expanded, so that the effect contents of the hold change effect for the hold display displayed in the hold display area can be made conspicuous and the display mode of the hold display is It makes it easy to pay attention to what kind of process changes. The hold display area is provided as an area in which the movement of the hold display is performed regardless of whether or not the hold change presentation is performed with respect to the hold display standby or the hold display. It is permitted to move the pending display across the symbol display area as part of the execution of.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reach state is formed as the variable display of the decorative symbol during the normal change, the symbol display area is returned to 100% of the display area as the reserved display area is erased. . That is, after the reach state is formed, reach effect is performed using the symbol display area returned to 100%. As described above, when the reach effect is performed, the symbol display area is expanded, so that the state in which attention can be paid to the hold display changes in the normal state and the reach effect as the effect display displayed in the symbol display area It can be noticed.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol display area is reduced to about 60% of the display area even when any of the on-hold movement change effect, the on-hold change effect, and the billiard on-off change effect is executed as the on-hold change effect. The rate at which the symbol display area decreases may be varied according to the degree of expectation of the pending change effect to be executed (the possibility of the display mode of the pending display changing). For example, in the case of executing a pending change effect in which the display mode of the pending display is likely to change, while the rate of decreasing the symbol display area is increased, the display mode of the pending display is less likely to change In order to execute the on-hold change effect, the rate at which the symbol display area decreases may be reduced. According to this, the possibility that the display mode of the pending display changes may not necessarily be grasped by the execution of the pending change presentation, and may be grasped also by the rate at which the symbol display area decreases.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the on-hold change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 147 shows an example of a specific effect in the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the on-hold movement change effect, and FIG. 148 shows an example of a specific effect in the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the ball on hold change effect FIG. 149 shows a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of billiards hold change effect.

  First, an example of a specific effect in the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the on-hold movement change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 147 (A), in the non-short time state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area 1600a occupying about 80% of the display area, and around the symbol display area 1600a. It is divided into a reserve display area 1600b which occupies about 20% of the display area. In this symbol display area 1600a, effect display including variation display of the decoration symbols 1605a to 1605c and symbol background display (design background image) around the decoration symbols 1605a to 1605c is performed based on the variation pattern. On the other hand, in the hold display area 1600b, a hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side and a hold background display (hold background image) around those hold displays are performed. Hold display 1601a at the lower left position of the display area, hold display 1601a at the lower right position of the display area, hold display 1601b at the lower right position of display area, hold display 1601c at the upper right position of the display area, hold display 1601c at the upper right position The hold display 1601 d of hold 4 is displayed at the position of, and the hold background display is displayed in the other part. The reserved background display is displayed in a mode (for example, different background color etc.) different from the symbol background display, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a symbol display area 1600a and a reserve display area 1600b. It is easy to recognize things. In addition, the display modes of the hold displays 1601a to 1601d of the hold 1 to 4 are white. In addition, with respect to the hold display 1601d of the hold 4, when the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 lights up, the display mode changes from white → blue → red → rainbow color (hold notice pattern when hold 4 lights on Number 18) has been determined.

  And, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, execution of the hold movement change presentation for the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 While the symbol display area 1600a decreases to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b increases to about 40%. In addition, as the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased, the hold displays 1601b to 1601d of the other holds 2 to 4 start moving clockwise while being displayed in the display area. In addition, the pending displays 1601b and 1601c of the pending 2 and 3 are up to the position after the movement based on that it is decided not to execute the pending change effect on the pending displays 1601b and 1601c of the pending 2 and 3 While moving with the shortest distance linearly, the hold display 1601d of hold 4 is to the position after movement based on the execution of the hold movement change presentation being determined for the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 Move while meandering. In the present effect example, the display mode is changed from white to blue while the hold display 1601d of hold 4 is moved. In addition, as a change of the display mode during movement of the reserve display, for example, although the color at the start of movement (white in this example) is held and there is no change until the halfway point of the movement route is reached, Make a gradation change that approaches the color after movement (blue in this presentation example) step by step from the time it reaches, and complete the change to the color after movement (blue in this presentation example) with the completion of movement. Etc. can be illustrated.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), after the predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c. The movement of the pending displays 1601b to 1601d has been completed. At this point of time, while the display modes of the new hold 1 and 2 hold displays 1601a and 1601b are white, the new hold 3 hold display 1601c has a blue display mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), at the time of starting variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 again, along with erasing the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 The hold displays 1601b and 1601c of the other hold 2 and 3 start moving clockwise while being displayed in the display area. In addition, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves linearly in the shortest distance to the position after movement based on the decision not to execute the hold change effect on the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 On the other hand, the hold display 1601c of the hold 3 moves meandering to the position after the movement based on the execution of the hold movement change presentation being determined with respect to the hold display 1601c of the hold 3. In the present effect example, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601c of hold 3 is moved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), after the predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c, but it is held before the predetermined time passes 2, 3 The pending displays 1601b and 1601c have been moved. At this point, the new hold 1 pending display 1601a has a white display mode, while the new hold 2 pending display 1601b has a red display mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), at the time of starting the change display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 again, along with erasing the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 The hold display 1601b of hold 2 other than the above is displayed in the display area and starts moving clockwise. Further, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves meandering to the position after the movement based on the execution of the hold movement change presentation being determined with respect to the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. In this effect example, when the display mode of the hold display changes from white to blue and from blue to red, it is longer than the distance that the hold display has moved, and it is recognized that the display mode of the hold display is highly likely to change. it can. In addition, when the holding display 1601b of holding 2 moves, since it crosses the front side of the symbol display area 1600a, it is easy to pay attention to whether or not the display mode changes. Further, in the present effect example, while the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is moved, the display mode is changed from blue to red.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), after the predetermined time has passed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c, but the hold 2 is held before the predetermined time passes. Finish moving the display 1601b. At this point in time, when the display mode is rainbow color, but the display mode is displayed in rainbow color, the lottery result is a big hit when the suspension display 1601a of the hold 1 is digested. The player's expectation for the big hit game can be raised.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the strike / hold change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the hold display area 1600b, a hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side is performed. However, in the present effect example, the hold is held at the lower left position of the display area. A hold display 1601a of 1 and a hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed at a lower right position of the display area. In addition, the display mode of the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 and the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is white. In addition, with respect to the hold display 1601b of the hold 2, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 lights up, the hold notification pattern (display notice pattern number 6 when hold 2 lights on) the display mode changes from white to red is decided It is done.

  And, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the execution of the holding change effect on the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 While the symbol display area 1600a decreases to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b increases to about 40%. Further, as the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is moved out of the display area and is erased once.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 148C and 148D, after the hold display 1601b for hold 2 moves out of the display area, the hold display 1601b for hold 2 goes out of the display area toward the position after movement. The light is moved within the display area as if the light emitted from the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is moving as the light source moves. In addition, as the light moves in the display area, countdowns of “3”, “2”, “1”, and “0” are displayed. This countdown corresponds to the time when the hold indication 1601b of hold 2 is erased, and the countdown approaches “0” as the erasure time is longer. That is, if the time to be erased is long, the countdown may reach “0”, but if the time to be erased is short, the countdown may end without reaching “0”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), after the time for which the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is erased, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 returns to the hold display area 1600b, but at the return time, The display mode is changed to red. After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), the movement of the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 ends before the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is stopped and displayed. At this time, when the display mode is red in the display mode 1601a of the new hold 1 but the display mode is displayed in red, at least reach is reached at the time of digesting the display 1 160a of the hold 1 Since it is decided to execute the effect, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit game and the small hit game.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the billiard reserve change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 149 (A), in the hold display area 1600b, a hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side is performed, but in this example of the effect, the hold is held at the lower left position of the display area. A hold display 1601a of 1 and a hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed at a lower right position of the display area. Moreover, the display mode of the hold display of hold 1 and 2 is white. In addition, with respect to the hold display 1601b of the hold 2, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 lights up, the hold notification pattern (display notice pattern number 6 when hold 2 lights on) the display mode changes from white to red is decided It is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), at the time of starting variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, execution of billiards hold change presentation to the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 While the symbol display area 1600a decreases to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b increases to about 40%. In addition, with the deletion of the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is first based on that the execution of the billiard hold change presentation is determined for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. It moves linearly at the shortest distance to the position after movement, with the display mode kept white. Further, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves, a ball display 1602 resembling a billiard ball appears in the red display mode in the hold display area 1600b. At this point, when the ball display 1602 appears in the red display mode, there is a possibility that the new hold 1 suspension display 1601a may change to the red display mode by the execution of the billiards hold change presentation. It can increase the player's expectation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), when the ball display 1602 appears in the hold display area 1600b, an image obtained by copying the central pressing operation section 303a in the pressing operation section 303 is displayed in the display area. The player is urged to operate the operation unit 303a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), when the player operates the center pressing operation unit 303a within a predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is fired, and the ball display 1602 is bound a plurality of times in the display area. Let On the other hand, even if the player does not operate the center pressing operation unit 303a within the predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is forcibly fired after the predetermined time has elapsed. Further, in the present effect example, although the operation effect of whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a is performed, the fluctuation time during which the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c are variably displayed at this time (in the fluctuation pattern When the set fluctuation time) is 4 seconds or less (when it is not possible to provide a standby time as to whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a), the ball is not performed without performing the operation effect. Fire display 1602. When the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, it crosses the front side of the symbol display area 1600a, so it is easy to pay attention to the ball display 1602.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 149 (E) and (F), after the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the ball display 1602 collides with the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 and the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is pushed out. Then, the ball display 1602 becomes a new hold 1 hold display 1601a. Thus, the display mode of the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 changes to red, which is the display mode of the ball display 1602, before the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is stopped and displayed. At this time, when the display mode is red, but the display mode is displayed in red, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is at least a reach at the time of digesting the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, and the reach effect is Since it is decided to execute, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit game and the small hit game. In the present effect example, when the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, only the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is displayed, and the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is displayed in red due to a collision with the ball display 1602. Although there is only a possibility of change, when two or more hold displays are displayed in the hold display area, which hold display has the ball display 1602 collide with, that is, display mode in which the hold display is red It can not be determined whether there is a possibility of change. For this reason, when two or more hold displays are displayed in the hold display area, any hold display changes to a red display mode (display mode of the ball display 1602) due to the collision of the ball display 1602 , And the direction in which the ball display 1602 advances can be made to pay attention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, an effect equivalent to the billiards hold change effect can be performed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 149 (E ′), after the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the ball display 1602 collides with the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (F ′), the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, and an effect display notifying that the “special mode” is entered as a new effect display appears. It is supposed to Therefore, even if the ball display 1602 does not collide with the hold display, it can be expected to pay attention to whether the effect display changes due to the collision with the effect display.

  In the present embodiment, when executing the on-hold change effect, the color is changed as the display mode of the on-hold display, but it is not limited to the change in color at the timing when the on-display mode can change. "A predetermined additional decoration display (such as a character) may be added to the hold display". In such a case, the jackpot expectation is made to differ depending on the type of the additional decoration display added to the hold display.

  Moreover, in addition to the configuration of the hold notification effect described above, when the hold movement change effect is executed as the hold change effect, not only the color change, but in the process of the hold display moving, “predetermined additional decoration display on hold display (A character etc.) may be added. For example, when the hold display moves due to the execution of the hold movement change presentation, the additional decoration display appears in the display area in the middle of the movement, and the additional decoration display approaches the hold display and is added to the hold display at the position after movement You may make it perform the production | presentation of whether it is.

  Moreover, in addition to the configuration of the hold notification effect described above, when the hold change effect is executed as a hold change effect, not only the color change but the hold display is displayed after the hold display moves out of the display area When returning to the area, “predetermined additional decoration display (character or the like) may be added to the hold display”. For example, after the hold display moves out of the display area by execution of the backfill change effect, the additional decoration display appears in the display area, and the additional decoration display moves out of the display area similarly to the hold display, and the hold display An effect of whether or not the additional decoration display is added when returning to the display area may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced from about 80% to about 60% of the display area at the start of the hold change effect, whereas the hold display area 1600b is about 20% of the display area It is increasing to about 40%. As described above, in the on-hold change effect, the on-hold display area 1600b is enlarged, but using the enlarged on-hold display area 1600b, an effect on on-hold background display is also executed to boost up the on-hold change effect. In the case of executing background movement change production as hold change production, for example, as a hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, it is replaced with one consisting of a character group of "chance!" While moving the hold display. May be In the case of executing hold back change effect as hold change effect, for example, as the hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, “during out of movement (during deletion) of the hold display outside the display area It may be replaced by an explanatory message such as “When the color changes, chances!” In addition, when executing the billiards hold change effect as the hold change effect, for example, as a hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, a “chance when the ball is hit in a period in which the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times! "" Or the like may be replaced by an explanatory message.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is used as a display region provided with the symbol display region 1600a and the suspension display region 1600b, but while providing two display devices, a display region including the two display devices Is divided into the symbol display area 1600a and the hold display area 1600b, and the symbol display area 1600a is decreased while the hold display area 1600b is increased with the start of the hold change effect. Good. For example, when the symbol display area 1600a is provided in the display apparatus having a large display area among the two display devices, and the hold display area 1600b is provided in the display apparatus having a small display area, triggered by the start of hold change effect. The display devices provided with the symbol display area 1600a and the hold display area 1600b may be switched.

[12. Over win in jackpot game production]
In the present embodiment, when performing a big hit game, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is limited to the predetermined number of defined rounds (14 rounds at the maximum in this embodiment) predetermined according to the big hit type. A round game is performed (the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are made available to accept the game ball B). One round game should be performed by opening and closing the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 a predetermined number of times (one time in the present embodiment), and the first large winning combination during one round game During the period until the specified number (maximum number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) of the game balls B wins in the mouth 2005 or the second large winning hole 2006, or the specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) It is open until the lapse of).

  In the above-mentioned one round game, when the game ball B of the specified number (the upper limit number of balls: 10 balls in this example) is won in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006, it is being released. It is intended to close a certain first winning opening 2005 or a second winning opening 2006. That is, when the first large winning opening 2005 is open, the first attacking hole 2005 is closed when the specified number of gaming balls B are detected by the first count sensor 2512. The solenoid 2515 is driven and controlled, but at that time, the entry (over winning) of gaming balls B exceeding the prescribed number may already occur in the first large winning opening 2005, in such a case, After the first big winning opening 2005 is closed, the first count sensor 2512 detects the number of gaming balls B exceeding the specified number. Similarly, when the second large winning opening 2006 is open, the second attack solenoid is closed so that the second large winning opening 2006 is closed when the specified number of gaming balls B is detected by the second count sensor 2513. There is a case where the entry of the game ball B (over winning) which has already exceeded the specified number in the second big winning prize port 2006 has occurred although the driving control of 2516 is performed at that time, in such a case, After the second big winning opening 2006 is closed, the second count sensor 2513 detects the number of gaming balls B exceeding the specified number. And, when an over winning occurs, as a bonus for the player having won the game ball B exceeding the assumption, in addition to the round effect performed in the round game, the effect using the effect display device 1600 The over prize winning effect is being executed.

  Specifically, each time the round game in the big hit game is started, a round start command instructing the number of rounds of the round game is transmitted from the main control board 1310. In addition, when the game ball B is won in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 and the first counting sensor 2512 or the second counting sensor 2513 detects the gaming ball B, the main control board 1310 A winning command to notify that effect is sent. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the round start command and the winning command are received, the number of rounds in the round game being executed, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning in the jackpot effect processing of step S714. An effect based on the number of game balls B winning in the mouth 2006 is executed as a round effect in the effect display device 1600. In addition, after the specified number of gaming balls B have won in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 during each round game in the big hit game, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening It is determined whether or not the game ball B has won a prize in 2006, that is, whether an over prize has occurred, and if an over prize has occurred, the number of occurrences of the over prize is counted during the execution of the big hit game. Do. However, even if two or more over winnings occur during one round game, the number of over winnings is one.

  And, when the over winning occurs, the over winning effect is executed as the effect using the effect display device 1600, but if the type of over winning effect is different according to the number of times the over winning occurs. I'm sorry. Specifically, when the number of times the over-winning has occurred is an odd count of 1, 3, 5 or 7 times, one of the characters A to E is determined, and a lottery effect for causing the determined character to appear While the number of occurrences of over-winning is an even count of 2, 4 or 6 times, a fixed effect of causing a character corresponding to the number of times of over-winning to occur is executed . In addition, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is the eighth or later count, the premium fixed effect which is not caused to appear in the seventh count is executed.

  First, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is an odd count of 1, 3, 5 or 7 times, the over winning prize effect determination table is used as shown in FIG. Decide which of ~ E will appear. Specifically, the type of the character set in the over winning prize determination table is determined by comparing the determination value set in the over winning prize determination table with the read random number for over winning prize determination. Do. As described above, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is an odd count of 1, 3, 5 or 7 times, any one of the characters A to E is determined, so when the over winning occurs. It can be made to pay attention to which character appears as the over prize winning effect.

  The over prize winning effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in the over prize winning effect determination table, the distribution of the determination value to the pattern for causing each character to appear among the characters A to E is the same degree, and the appearance rate of each character is the same degree. The distribution may be made different, and the appearance rate of each character may be made different.

  If the number of occurrences of the over winning is an even count of 2 times, it is decided to cause the character F to appear during over winning using the over winning winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (B). Do. Similarly, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is an even count of 4 times, the character G is made to appear in the over winning effect using the over winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (C). If the number of occurrences of the over winning is determined to be an even count of 6 times, the character H is made to appear in the over winning effect using the over winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (D). decide. As described above, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is an even count of 2, 4 or 6, the character determined in advance corresponding to the number of occurrences of the over winning is determined. When the occurrence of a character occurs, it is possible to recognize the number of times the over prize has occurred due to the appearance of the character.

  When the number of occurrences of the over winning is the eighth or later count, all the characters A to H appear in the over winning effect using the over winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (E). Decide to let it go. As described above, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is up to the seventh count, the character appears only in the over winning at the time of the over winning, whereas when it is the eighth or later count, the over is awarded. Since all of the characters A to H appear in the effect at the time of winning, it is possible to obtain a sense of accomplishment that the number of times of occurrence of the over winning exceeds the eighth while paying attention to the premium effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is an odd count of 1, 3, 5 or 7 times, one of the characters A to E is determined, and a lottery effect for causing the determined character to appear While the number of occurrences of over-winning is an even count of 2, 4 or 6 times, a fixed effect of causing a character corresponding to the number of times of over-winning to occur is executed . Thus, depending on whether the number of occurrences of the over winning is an odd count of 1, 3, 5 or 7 times, or an even counting of 2, 4 or 6 times, it is possible to give different enjoyment to the over winning effect it can. That is, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is an even count of 2, 4 or 6, the number of occurrences of the over winning due to the appearance of the character is recognized while being 1, 3, 5 In the case of seven odd counts, it is possible to give fun to notice whether any of the characters A to E appear.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when two or more over winnings occur during one round game, the number of times the over winning occurs is one count. Thus, during one round game, the over prize winning effect is not executed twice, and the over winning prize effect is easily recognized for each round game in which the over winning prize has occurred. Further, for example, when two over winnings occur, if the number of times the over winnings occur is two counts, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are not executed in order (for example, over during the round game after the lottery effect) Even when the player wins, the lottery effect is executed, and the lottery effect is continued, so that the effect the player was looking forward to may not be executed. However, in the present embodiment, such a situation is prevented. it can.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the big hit game will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), during the execution of the big hit game, as the round effect using the effect display device 1600, the number of rounds of the running round game, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning An effect of displaying the total number of winning balls (total number of payouts) and the like for the winning of the mouth 2006 is executed. Based on the fact that the game ball B has won in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006, the number of obtained (the number of payouts) according to the number of winnings is updated (additional display) Unlike the above-mentioned over prize winning effect, even if two or more over prize wins occur during one round game, the number of wins according to the respective prize wins It is added to reflect all the number of payouts). That is, when two or more over winnings occur during one round game, while limiting the number of executions of the over winning at the time of winning, it is decided not to limit the update of the total winning number display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), when over winning occurs during each round game, an over winning at the time of over winning is started as the effect using the effect displaying device 1600, first, the effect displaying device 1600 From the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 provided on the lower right of the stage, towards the central portion of the effect display device 1600, effect display is performed as if light is collected. As a result, when the game ball B exceeding the specified number is won in the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006, that is, when an over winning occurs, the player is likely to notice that effect, and then The characters appearing in can be noticed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), in the over prize winning effect, a character corresponding to the number of times the above-mentioned over prize occurs is made to appear. Specifically, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is an odd count of 1, 3, 5 or 7 times, the lottery effect for causing any one of the characters A to E to appear is executed, whereas it is over. When the number of occurrences of the winning is an even count of 2, 4 or 6, the fixed effect for causing the character corresponding to the number of occurrences of the over winning to appear is executed. In addition, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is the eighth and subsequent counts, a premier fixed effect is performed in which all the characters A to H appear.

  In addition, in the above-described over prize winning effect, a character corresponding to the number of times the over winning occurred is made to appear using the effect display device 1600, but the next round game when the over winning occurs during the round game At the start time, the over prize winning effect is ended, and the appearing character is erased. And, at the start of the round game, by resuming the round effect corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game, it is made to not miss the opening of the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 . In this effect example, at the time of starting the next round game when the over winning occurs during the round game, the over winning effect is finished, but a predetermined time (for example, from the time when the over winning occurs) To perform the over prize winning effect over 4 to 5 seconds), and to continue the over prize winning effect until the predetermined time elapses, even when starting the next round game after the occurrence of the over winning prize You may In such a case, since the over prize winning effect is always executed for a predetermined time due to the occurrence of the over winning, the over prize winning effect can be enjoyed leisurely.

  In the above-mentioned over prize winning time effect, it is decided to produce the effect when entering the ball (over winning) of the game ball B which exceeds the specified number to the first big winning prize port 2005 or the second big winning prize port 2006 occurs However, when an over winning occurs in the first large winning opening 2005 having a specific area inside, there is no effect during over winning, and only an over winning when an over winning occurs in the second large winning opening 2006 It may be made to perform the hour effect. In this embodiment, at the time of passing the specific area of the first big winning opening 2005, it is decided to perform the big hit finalization effect which indicates that the execution of the big hit game is decided, but according to the above configuration, the specific area is made to pass It is possible to prevent the execution of the big hit finalization effect from being obstructed by the occurrence of the accidental over winning at the game timing of.

  Further, in addition to configuring the above-mentioned over prize winning effect to be executable, the bottom right flock winning slot provided in the vicinity of the second big winning slot 2006 during the big hit game (for example, the bottom right of the effect display device 1600) When a game ball is won in a general winning opening 2001) provided in the game, an bonus effect indicating an award winning ball different from the winning ball for the second winning hole 2006 for the winning of the gaming ball is performed. May be In such a case, control can be performed to suppress one of the executions so as to prevent the overlap between the over prize winning effect and the bonus effect. For example, when the game ball wins in the lower right flock winning opening during the over prize execution, the execution of the bonus effect is suppressed while the over winning occurs during the bonus effect. It can be illustrated that priority is given to the effect being executed, such as suppressing the execution of the over prize winning effect. However, there is a payout of the winning balls when any of the execution conditions of the over prize winning effect and the bonus effect is satisfied, and the total number of winning balls obtained in the round effect using the effect display device 1600 (total payout number) It is supposed to be added to the display of.

  As described above, when the over prize is not executed while the over prize occurs, the number of occurrences of the over prize is not counted. As a result, in the case of executing the over prize at the next time, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are executed in order with respect to the already executed over prize effect, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Can be prevented.

  In the above, when over prize occurs during execution of the bonus effect, the execution of the over prize effect is suppressed, but only when the number of times the over prize occurs is the eighth or later count, It may be replaced with the over prize winning effect (premium fixed effect). As described above, when the number of occurrences of the over winning is the eighth or later count, the number of occurrences of the over winning is the eighth or later by reliably executing the premiere effect as the over winning at the time of the over winning. It is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of loss, such as not being able to see the premiere effect, though it is a count of.

[13. Modified example of light emission display of light guide plate]
Next, a modification of the light emission display of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 152 and FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modification, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are divided into a first LED group 2630a and a second LED group 2630b in response to the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301. The third LED group 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d emit light in order, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d in order, and the center of the front light guide plate 2610 Performs light-emitting effects such as animation with motion that spreads outward from the top.

  Specifically, all the decorative symbols in the left and right rows are temporarily displayed with the same symbol ("7" in this example) as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600, and all reach states are formed. The reduced design is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display device 1600 and the first LED group 2630a of the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light as reach effect etc. The first pattern 2614a surrounding the center of the front surface light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light by causing light to enter from the one specific light receiving portion 2612a, and the effect display device can be visible through the portion surrounded by the first pattern 2614a. “Press the button!” Is displayed on the screen 1600 (FIG. 152 (A)).

  Then, when the player depresses the pressing operation unit 303 within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), the decorative symbols in the left row are reduced and displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600 and the decorative symbols in the right row are displayed After displaying the middle row decorative pattern in the center of the effect display device 1600 so as to be visible through the portion surrounded by the first pattern 2614a while displaying the reduced size in the lower right portion of the device 1600, the left side decorative pattern is left The pause display is performed with a symbol ("6" in this example) different from the decorative symbol in the row and the right row (Fig. 152 (B)).

  Then, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are caused to emit light in the order of the second LED group 2630 b, the third LED group 2630 c, and the fourth LED group 2630 d, Second pattern 2614b (FIG. 152 (B)), third pattern 2614 c (FIG. 152 (C)) by causing light to enter from the portion 2612b, the third specific light receiving portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light receiving portion 2612d. Light is emitted in the order of the fourth pattern 2614 d (FIG. 152 (D)), and light emission effects such as animation with a motion that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 are performed.

  In the front effect unit 2600 of this example, a reflector (not shown) attached to a part of the right side of the front light guide plate 2610 and an upper surface of the reflector are attached to the right side of the front light guide plate 2610. A front light guide plate decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs 2660 for emitting light are mounted and a plurality of LEDs 2660 are provided in front of them to collect light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 2660 to increase light intensity And a light collecting member 2670. Further, on the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, a plurality of fine reflection recesses 2616 for reflecting light incident from the plurality of LEDs 2660 forward are formed.

  Then, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are caused to emit light in the order of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, thereby the first pattern 2614a. The second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are made to emit light in this order, and the light-emitting effect such as animation with motion that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 several times (1 The plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 may be divided into a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, and a fourth LED group. While stopping any of the light emitting devices 2630 d in the state of emitting light, the plurality of LEDs 2660 are caused to emit light and the light guide plate main body 2 The light is removed from the middle of the design 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d) by making light enter the light guide plate main body 2611 from the upper right of 11 The pattern 2615 is made to emit light, and by being shot out by the shooting pattern 2615, an aspect in which a crack is included in the middle row of decorative patterns is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 152 (D)). At this time, an arrow of light is emitted toward the center of the front light guide plate 2610 to shoot the center of the pattern 2614 on the effect display device 1600 located behind the light guide plate main body 2611 in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 2660 Such effect display is performed, and then the image 2615 is assisted (auxiliary display) by causing the image to disappear.

  Specifically, the back of the radiation pattern 2615 (only needs to be covered at least in part, including the area other than the back of the radiation pattern 2615 so that light travels in a direction gradually away from the vicinity of the plurality of LEDs 2660 The image may be displayed gradually on the object to complete the image overlapping the radiation pattern 2615, and the arrows of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 may be the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a) by eliminating the image. Movement that spreads outward from the center of the front surface light guide plate 2610 in the order of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d. The effect is as if the light-emitting effect like the animation with a stop.

  In addition, the shot pattern 2615 includes a portion displayed in the upper layer and a portion displayed in the lower layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d). Specifically, on the surface side of the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) on the front side of the part of the firing pattern 2615 that is stuck to the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). The portion representing a certain part (the right side portion of the radiation pattern 2615 divided and displayed on the left and right) is displayed in the upper layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614 a to fourth pattern 2614 d), A portion (left and right divided) of 2615 representing the back side of the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) by stabbing the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) The left side portion of the firing pattern 2615 to be displayed is the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d). It is displayed in the lower layer against. Thus, the perspective based on the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d) can be expressed, and the arrows of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 have the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d) It can be realistically expressed like shooting through the center of the.

  Further, as described above, the light collecting member 2670 is provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660 for emitting the light emitting pattern 2615 to condense the light and increase the intensity of the light to enter the light guide plate main body 2611 Let On the other hand, the light collecting members 2670 are not provided on the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640, and these lights are diffused and enter the light guide plate main body 2611. Therefore, the radiation pattern 2615 can be made to emit light with light stronger than the patterns 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) emitted by the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640. However, the light is gradually weakened as the shot-out pattern 2615 moves away from the plurality of LEDs 2660 (as the reflection recess 2616 of the light guide plate main body 2611 moves away from the plurality of LEDs 2660, the light is incident from the plurality of LEDs 2660) By gradually reducing the ratio of reflecting light forward, light that can be viewed from the front of the light guide plate main body 2611 is gradually weakened, etc.), and light emission from the radiation pattern 2615 is also used to express a sense of perspective.

  Further, as a result of the variable display, when it is a big hit, the light guide plate main body 2611 is made to emit light and the mode in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is broken is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and then left row And the decorative pattern in the middle row, which is temporarily displayed with a symbol different from the decorative pattern in the right row ("6" in this example), is split (broken) and the same pattern as the decorative symbols in the left and right rows A change is made and the big hit symbol is displayed for a fixed stop (Fig. 153 (F)). On the other hand, when it becomes a loss as a result of the said fluctuation display, after making the light guide plate main body 2611 emit light and making the decoration display pattern of middle row a crack on the effect display device 1600, the left row is displayed. And the decoration pattern of the middle row which is temporarily displayed with a different pattern (in this example, "6") different from the decoration pattern of the right row and the decoration pattern of the left row and the right row without breaking (without being destroyed) Is maintained with a different symbol, and the lost symbol is determined and displayed (FIG. 153 (E)).

  In addition, when developing a reach effect into a super reach effect etc. as well as the case where the decorative symbol is determined and stopped and displayed, for example, in FIG. 152 (D), the symbols temporarily stopped and displayed are different from the decorative symbols in the left and right rows. It is possible to execute the above-described effect also in the case of developing into a super reach effect after destroying the middle row of decorative symbols. In addition, when performing the above-mentioned production as reach production, when it becomes big hit or developing reach production to super reach production etc etc it makes shooting pattern 2615 emit light, when it becomes losing or when it is super production for reach production The first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are arranged in order of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d without emitting light from the shot pattern 2615, for example, in the case After stopping the light-emitting effect such as animation having a motion that spreads from the center to the outside, the lost design may be displayed for confirmation. In addition, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d move in such a manner as to spread outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 without causing the lighted pattern 2615 to emit light. After stopping the light emission effect such as the animation, the flash pattern 2615 may be made to emit light to derive a big hit pattern or a reverse effect may be performed to develop reach effect such as super reach effect.

  Thus, in the light emission display of the light guide plate of the modification, the front light guide plate 2610 includes a plurality of patterns 2614 (a first pattern 2614a, a second pattern 2614b, a third pattern 2614c, a fourth pattern 2614d) and a shot-off pattern 2615. Since it is possible to realistically express the sense of perspective while emitting light to the same light guide plate (front light guide plate 2610), it is possible to give surprises and surprises to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game fun.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the retracted position where it rises near the upper edge in the front view gaming area 5a. And two pairs of first and second protruding decorative portions 3352a and 3353a of the two first and second protruding decorative bodies 3352 and 3353, respectively, on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. It is located in the 1st position which piled up one after another one by one. Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the right side. From this, the central decorative body 3351 can be seen in the vicinity of the upper edge in the front view gaming area 5a, and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a respectively on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 The interior of the game area 5a is decorated with the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In a normal state, since the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a located at the first position overlap in the front and back, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projection on the front side are Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (the player side), it can be made difficult to notice the presence of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the rear side. It can be recognized that the number of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is only the number currently visible. When the LEDs mounted on the upper front central decoration substrate, the first protruding decoration portion decoration substrate, and the second protruding decoration portion decoration substrate are made to emit light in the normal state, the central decoration 3351, the first protruding decoration portion 3352a and the Since the two projecting decorative portions 3353a can be made to emit light and decorate, the central decorative body 3351 and the first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decoration can be formed by the central decorative body 3351 or the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a. The portion 3353a can be highlighted, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351 or the like. In addition, since the central decoration 3351 and the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decorations 3353 are in the retracted position near the upper edge of the front view gaming area 5a in the normal state, the front view game The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed at the center of the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351 and the like, and in a good state from the player side The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can enjoy the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the gaming state which is changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the lower appearing position. Then, the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 descend together. At this time, the second protruding decorative portion 3353 a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 is on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the first protruding decorative portion 3352 a of the remaining first protruding decorative body 3352 is on the right side of the central decorative body 3351, The lower ends of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are attached, and the upper ends of the second link rods 3304 on the left and right are rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 within a predetermined range. By being attached to the tip of the first link rod 3303 that is attached, it is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the central decoration 3351, so it descends together with the central decoration 3351 First projecting decorative body 3352 and second projecting decorative body 3353 (first projecting decorative portion 3352a and second projecting decorative portion 3353a) More left and right second link rod 3304 is pulled to the same downward as the moving direction of the respective central decorative body 3351, an upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 is able to slide downwardly relative to the unit base 3301. The upper end portions of the left and right second link rods 3304 can be slid vertically by the first link rod 3303 within a range shorter than the moving distance (raising and lowering distance) of the central decorative body 3351. The upper end of each of the left and right second link rods 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction before the 3351 reaches the appearance position of the falling end. Then, after the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end portion in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 is further moved toward the lower emerging position, the lower end portion of the second link rod 3304 is further located Of the two first projecting ornaments 3352 and the second projecting ornaments 3353 which are going to be lowered together with the central ornament 3351 by the left and right second link rods 3304. The first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side are pulled toward the upper unit base 3301 side, and by this force, the two first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 become central decoration The center of the central decoration 3351 by the first connecting rod 3352 b and the second connecting rod 3353 b attached to the rear side of the body 3351 The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on both left and right sides are rotated in different directions with respect to the axis extending back and forth as the center, and the front and back overlapping is eliminated from the first position where the front and back are overlapped. Move to the second position. As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, which appeared to be one on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, are turned into two and the fan spreads, and the central decorative body 3351 and One large decoration can be formed by the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a radially extending around the central decoration 3351 and can be shown to the player. Therefore, since all the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 moved to the center of the game area 5a, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second While increasing the number of projecting decorative portions 3353a, it is possible to punish the player's mind, and the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a around the central decorative body 3351 are spread, and the entire decoration is made. Can be made large, and a strong impact can be given to the player to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when the central front body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position of the rising end to the appearance position of the falling end by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper end of the left and right second link rods 3304 is the lower end in the sliding direction. The two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 overlap each other until reaching (a pivoting end to the lower side on the tip side of the first link rod 3303). The descent together with the central decoration 3351 in the first position, and after the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the central decoration 3351 appears in the direction of appearance (downward ) From the first position where the two left and right first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a overlap with each other while moving to the second position where the overlapping is eliminated. The central decorative body 3351 will be expanded radially, and the player can be made to show a movable effect in which the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 perform two steps of movement. Therefore, by appropriately controlling the upper front drive motor 3302, it is possible to stop the movement (rendering) at the first stage or move it to the second stage (rendering), and It is possible to increase variations of movable effects using the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353, make it possible to entertain the player with various effects, and make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, since the central decoration 3351 can be moved from the retracted position of the rising end to the appearance position of the falling end by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the gaming state, in the normal state of the central decoration 3351 in the retracted position, When the gaming state changes, the player can be snarled and pounded by whether or not the central decorative body 3351 descends to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. Then, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the emerging position side by the upper front drive motor 3302, and the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are moved to the first stage where rotational movement does not occur. Since the decoration body 3351 and the two first protruding decoration bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353 move downward in the normal state, it seems that something may be good for the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation for the game. Furthermore, when the central decoration 3351 is lowered to the second stage, that is, when the central decoration 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the falling edge, four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative portions 3353a radially expand around the central decoration 3351. The central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can show a large decoration to the player, and the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a and the like can be made to feel like the notice from the sky is given to the player by the descent, advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage over the player Can make it possible to make the player feel more hoped for the game, and can make it difficult for the player to get bored, Against it is possible to suppress the lowering of interest.

  Thus, when lowering the central decorative body 3351 from the retracted position to the emerging position, the movements of the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be changed in two steps Therefore, the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous differs between when the player stops in the first step and when the player stops in the second step. It can be recognized that the second stage has higher expectation than the first stage, and the central decoration 3351 and the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decoration can be suggested. With the body 3353 various expected values can be displayed to the player.

  In addition, the central decoration 3351 is made to descend to the appearance position near the center in the front view gaming area 5a, and by lowering the central decoration 3351 to the appearance position, a space is secured around the central decoration 3351. In order to facilitate this, the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a can be moved from the first position to the second position and radially spread around the central decorative body 3351 at the appearance position, and the central decorative structure The body 3351 and the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decorations 3353 can form as large a decoration as possible. Therefore, when the central decoration 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 in accordance with the gaming state, the central decoration 3351 and the four first protrusions extending radially around it around the center of the game area 5a Since the player can be made to show a large decoration by the decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, the player can be surprised, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. While being able to be enjoyed, it is possible to entertain large decorations by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  Furthermore, when the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the emerging position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are in the first position. To move to the second position, and to move the central decoration 3351 and the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decorations 3353 by one upper front drive motor 3302, When performing rendering (movable rendering) using the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353, it is sufficient to control only one upper front drive motor 3302. Such load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing rendering using the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353, performing rendering using other movable decorative bodies, luminescent decorative bodies, etc. simultaneously Also, since it is possible to suppress an increase in load applied to the control of the effect, the control of the effect becomes unstable due to the overload, and the upper front drive motor 3302 causes the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 And it is possible to prevent the movement of the second projecting decorative body 3353 from making a jerky, and make sure to exhibit the rendering effect using the central decorative body 3351 or the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can provide the above-described effects.

  Also, as described above, while the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since the movement is performed, the speed at which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move (rotate) to the second position is relatively faster than the moving speed of the central decoration 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding parts 3352a and the second protruding parts 3353a can be suddenly spread around the central decoration 3351, and the player is surprised that the central decoration 3351 and two second The presentation using the one projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, as described above, after the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position toward the appearance position to some extent, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are It is made to move from the position to the second position. That is, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are moved to the center side to some extent from near the upper edge of the front view gaming area 5a, and then spread radially around the central decorative body 3351. Since the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a are moved to the second position, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decoration can be moved from the position to the second position. The portion 3353a can be made difficult to abut on another member, and breakage of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, and the other members can be prevented.

  In addition, when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front central decoration substrate, the first protruding decoration portion decoration substrate, and the second protruding decoration portion decoration substrate are made to emit light, the central decoration 3351 and the four first protruding decoration portions 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be individually light emitting and decorated, the light emitting decoration of the central decorative body 3351 or the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a makes the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding. The decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351 or the like. Therefore, before lowering the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 from the retracted position to the emergent position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper front central decorative substrate, the first projecting decoration The player is decorated by emitting a light by the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on both left and right sides by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the partial decorative substrate and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate. Since the upper front drive motor 3302 can move the central decorative body 3351 or the like to the appearance position, the player can be harassing and pounding, and the player can be entertained. Can not. Then, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position on the center side of the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302 and the four first decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a are radially arranged around the central decorative body 3351 Can be made to surprise the player and make him think that there is something good, and can increase the player's expectation for the game. When the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the upper front central decorative substrate, the first projecting decorative portion decorative substrate, and the second projecting decorative portion decorative substrate are formed into a central decorative body 3351 and four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and By making the light emitting decoration of the two projecting decoration portion 3353a possible, it is possible to show the player the decoration that greatly shines in the middle of the game area 5a, so that the player has an advantage in the advantageous gaming state (eg, "big hit game") Can be considered to occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, when the central front body 3351 is lowered by the upper front drive motor 3302 to the appearing position at the center of the gaming area 5a, Because (the part of) the effect image is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352, and the second projecting decorative body 3353, it is possible for the player to notice the descent of the central decorative body 3351 or the like to draw attention. It is possible to move from the first position to the second position to show the four first and second projecting decorative portions 3352a and 3353a radially extending around the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, in the center of the game area 5a, a large decoration can be reliably shown to the player by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, and the above-described effects Can be a pachinko machine 1 that reliably plays

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center character 2500 is disposed at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, and the gaming ball B is in the area excluding the frame of the center character 2500. Can play the game in which A front effect unit 2600 provided with a transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center character 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame, and the effect is disposed rearward through the front light guide plate 2610 The effect image displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed. In this state, according to the gaming state changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a, a predetermined LED 2630 of the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the upper edge of the front light guide plate 2610 via the reflector 2620 When any of (the first LED group 2630 a, the second LED group 2630 b, the third LED group 2630 c, and the fourth LED group 2630 d) is made to emit light, the LED 2630 is identified on the circumferential surface of the front light guide plate 2610 Light is applied to the light receiving unit 2612 (any one of the first specific light receiving unit 2612 a, the second specific light receiving unit 2612 b, the third specific light receiving unit 2612 c, and the fourth specific light receiving unit 2612 d), and the specific light entering A pattern 2614 (a first pattern 2614a, a second pattern 2614b, a third picture) corresponding to the light incident from the light unit 2612 into the front light guide plate 2610 2614C, so that the fourth picture 2614D, one) is the luminous display. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, and a plurality of through holes 2622 penetrating the fixing recess 2621 move to the specific light receiving unit 2612 side. Since the plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 through the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 to be faced, it is possible to make the LED 2630 as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light entrance portion 2612) of the light guide plate main body 2611 While the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612, and the light from the LED 2630 can be prevented from being diffused by the through hole 2622, and the specific light reception not corresponding Irradiation of light to the portion 2612 can be prevented.

  And the light which entered into the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light incident part 2612 corresponds to the corresponding reflection recess 2613 (first reflection recess 2613a, second reflection recess 2613b, third reflection recess 2613c, fourth reflection recess 2613d The light irradiated in the reflective recess 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflective recess 2613 extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612, the light that is emitted to the reflective recess 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction, Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 is included, the eyes of the player sitting on the front of the game area 5a (light guide plate main body 2611) have the light guide plate main body 2611 by the reflective recess 2613. The light reflected or refracted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light reaches and the light reflecting recess 2613 appears to glow, and the picture 2614 configured by the light reflecting recess 2613 is seen to be illuminated and displayed. On the other hand, light entering the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light entrance portion 2612 will also reach the reflective concave portion 2613 which does not correspond to the specific light entrance portion 2612, but the reflective concave portion 2613 which does not correspond is Since the light extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the specific light incident portion 2612, the direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflection concave portion 2613 is on the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It does not reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, and the non-corresponding reflective recess 2613 does not appear to glow. As described above, when the specific light receiving portion 2612 is irradiated with light by the LED 2630, only the reflective recess 2613 corresponding to the specific light receiving portion 2612 reflects or refracts light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It can be made to reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and can be shown to the player as if only the pattern 2614 composed of the corresponding reflective recess 2613 is being lighted. .

  Therefore, by changing the specific light receiving portion 2612 to which light is emitted by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 to be emitted, it is possible to change variously the pattern 2614 to be displayed by light in the front light guide plate 2610. The light emission display of 2614 makes it possible to surprise and entertain the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest for the game. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed to be sequentially associated with one another, the plurality of LEDs 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group according to the game state When the light emitting diode 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d are sequentially emitted, a plurality of patterns (first image 2614a, second image 2614b, third image 2614c, fourth image 2614d) are sequentially emitted and displayed on the surface light guide plate 2610, and the animation is performed. It is possible to show the player a luminous display with movement like.

  Specifically, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are displayed in order of light, and after the last fourth pattern 2614d, the first pattern is returned again and the first pattern 2614a is repeated again. In the case where the light emission display is repeated in order, it is possible to show the player a light emission display which continues to move from the outside to the center by the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give the person an illusion that the momentum is concentrated, and to make the expectation of the game to be heightened by making it think that there is something good. On the other hand, contrary to the above, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second pattern 2614b, and the first pattern 2614a are displayed in the order of light emission, and the second after the last first pattern 2614a returns to the first and the fourth again In the case where the light emission display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the player can be made to show the light emission display which keeps moving from the center to the outside by the plural patterns of the light guide plate. It is possible for the player to make an illusion to expand from the center or an illusion to move forward, and to allow the player to foresee change in the gaming state. As described above, since it is possible to show the player the luminous display having motion like animation, it is possible for the player to be strong by the movable luminous display by the front light guide plate 2610 which has never been seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1 It is possible to give an impact, to attract the player's interest strongly, and to make it possible for the player to think that the advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is generated, to the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted within the frame of the center character 2500 to which the center character 2500 is attached at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, light is emitted even if the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light by the LED 2630 The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making it difficult to see the game. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted and to enjoy the game in a good state.

  In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where the light guide plate 2610 is attached by two members. The backlash between them can be eliminated, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at the desired position with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned relative to the specific light entrance portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 Luminescent display can be reliably performed.

  Furthermore, since the pattern 2614 is configured by a plurality of reflection recesses 2613 extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the specific light entrance portion 2612, the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 are made of the light guide plate main body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be guided by arranging the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, which can be disposed on a specific side (here, upper side) in the peripheral edge. It can be disposed only on the upper side of the light plate main body 2611. Thereby, compared with the case where the front cover (frame) is provided over the entire periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 without the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 being surrounded by the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630). Therefore, since it is possible to avoid dividing the effect image or decoration of the effect display device 1600 arranged behind, it is possible to make the effect image etc easy to see from the player side, While being able to enjoy the effect image in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, the pachinko machine 1 with a sense of opening can be obtained by the absence of a frame-shaped partition in the gaming area 5a in front view, The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved to make the pachinko machine 1 with appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention.

  In addition, as described above, since a plurality of (four in this case) patterns 2614 can be displayed by light emission with one front light guide plate 2610, it is not necessary to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the prior art. The dimension in the front-rear direction concerning the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible, and the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center character 2500, so the front light guide plate 2610 is to the player side The position can be as close as possible, and a wide space can be easily secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper back movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged to improve the appearance of the game area 5a to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and in addition to the effect by the light emission display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect By performing movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., various effects can be provided to the player, and the player is entertained to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

  In addition, since the front surface light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center character 2500, the peripheral edge of the front surface light guide plate 2610 and the frame of the center character 2500 are aligned with each other. And the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be made difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to surprise the player who thought that 2610 does not exist by giving a strong impact to the player and enjoying the light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  Furthermore, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 from the player side, the appearance of the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated by the reflectors 2620 etc. being seen. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By light-emitting and displaying the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610, the player can be greatly surprised by the light-emitting display which the player had not predicted, and the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good and to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 Therefore, it is possible to show various effects to the player by combining them appropriately, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 are displayed. Thus, the player can be entertained by the effect produced by the player, and the decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 Is different, and by displaying effect images associated with the plurality of patterns 2614 light-emitting and displayed by the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the pattern 2614 being light-emitting and displayed. The effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper rear decorative body 3220 and the upper rear decorative body 3220 on which the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 which move vertically are arranged on the game board 5 having the game area 5a. A top rear left decoration substrate and a top rear right decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for emitting and decorating the top rear right decoration 3240 and the top rear left decoration 3220 and the top rear right decoration 3240 are mounted are attached Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and the force to move the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward by gravity acts in a large state. In this state, when transporting the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) or installing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) on the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrates in the pachinko machine 1 When the force for moving the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 is further applied, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 The clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240). The roller 3254 is accommodated by the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 even when the output member 3253 on the output side of the The roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b by being pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 2511, and a force acts to rotate the housing case 3251 by the plurality of rollers 3254. It becomes. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, a frictional resistance is generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case is formed via the plurality of rollers 3254. Since the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 is resisted by the force to rotate 3251, the housing case 3251 does not rotate, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, the output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper back left decoration 3220 side and upper back right decoration 3240 side) from the upper back left drive motor 3214 side to the upper back right drive motor 3234 side Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be restrained from falling freely. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, so that the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can The player can prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end to damage the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232 and the other members. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by surely enjoying the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped in the manufacturing plant, even if the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are shipped at the origin position, the upper back left by the clutch mechanism 3250 Since the decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving freely, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 when installed on the island facility of the game hall It is not necessary to carry out the process of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the burden on the installation can be reduced.

  In addition, when installing or maintaining the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from the regular position (origin position) for some reason In this case, when the operator tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the normal position by hand, the clutch mechanism 3250 tightens the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 as a torque limiter. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are prevented from moving by locking the rotation on the output side according to the load of rotation by tightening with 3255, the operator can use the upper rear left decorative body In order to move 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, a stronger force is applied to the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 When the force to rotate the storage case 3251 through the plurality of rollers 3254 is larger than the frictional resistance generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, the storage case against the frictional resistance. The sliding occurs between 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case 3251 is rotated, and the output member 3253 is rotated together with the storage case 3251 so that the lock is released, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is performed. Is transmitted to the upper back left drive motor 3214 and the upper back right drive motor 3234 through the input member 3252. Therefore, a strong force acting on the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 is It can be released to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper It is possible to rear right decorative body 3240 and the clutch mechanism 3250 and the like can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, according to the game state which changes due to the fact that game is done inside game territory 5a, top back left drive motor 3214 and top back right unit 3230 of top back left unit 3210 in top back movable presentation unit 3200 of back unit 3000. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the rotation is transmitted through the clutch mechanism 3250 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 are in front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 move downward from the upper side of the inside, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and Surprise the player by the descent (appearance) of the upper back right decoration 3240 The upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be made to pay attention to the player, and the movement and decoration of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be enjoyed and the upper By lowering the rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, it is possible to make the player think that something is good may be caused, and the expectation for the game is heightened, and the interest is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decoration 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240). Therefore, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, and the vibration from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies etc. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate as the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 try to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253 The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the A state where the roller 3254 has been bitten between 3251 inner surface and the cam surface 3253B, force to rotate the accommodating case 3251 by a plurality of rollers 3254 is to act. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, a frictional resistance is generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case is formed via the plurality of rollers 3254. Since the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 is resisted by the force to rotate 3251, the housing case 3251 does not rotate, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, the output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper back left decoration 3220 side and upper back right decoration 3240 side) from the upper back left drive motor 3214 side to the upper back right drive motor 3234 side Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be restrained from lowering by themselves, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the left slider 3212 via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be restricted. It is possible to prevent the upper back right decoration 3240 from moving unexpectedly (falling), and the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 move unintendedly so that the player feels distrust to the player. To make the player enjoy the movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are about to be lowered, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be stopped at any height position via the right slider 3232, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that are stopped moving up and down at the position, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. It can be done.

  In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the upper rear left The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the early breakage of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented and the upper portion It is possible to prevent interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the projecting portion 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock spring 3260. The roller 3254 is immediately urged to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper back left decoration 3220 side and the upper back right decoration 3240 side in the case of urging to the protrusion 3252 a close to each other. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and after the rotation from the upper rear left decoration 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration 3240 side acts, the lock The rotation of the output member 3253 can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel discomfort in the movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple configuration using the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, the plurality of rollers 3254, etc., two planetary gear mechanisms are provided as the clutch mechanism. Since it is easy to miniaturize the whole as compared with the case of the above, by miniaturizing the clutch mechanism 3250, space for arranging the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or other members) It becomes possible to make it easy to secure, and it is possible to make the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 relatively large in size and make them stand out, and the large upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 The pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly and have high appeal to the player.

  Furthermore, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 including the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 can be selected according to the game state. By appropriately raising and lowering the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the respective left sliders 3212 and right sliders 3232, it is possible to play various patterns of movable effects by the two upper rear left decorative bodies 3220 and the upper rear right decorative bodies 3240. It is possible to show the player, and make it difficult for the player to get bored, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest for the game. At this time, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are respectively provided with the clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are as described above. The player can enjoy the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and the decrease in the interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the gaming state, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper By bringing the back right decoration 3240 into contact with each other, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be united to form a large decoration, so a large decoration appears. Can give a strong impact to the player and can entertain the player, and the advantageous gaming state (e.g. It can be thought that a "big hit game" may occur, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest. When the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 abut each other and unite, it is attempted to move the upper back right decoration 3240 or the upper back left decoration 3220 on the opposite side by bringing the other into contact with each other. However, since each clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, as described above, the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (from the output side) Even if the force to rotate is applied, the roller 3254 is engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 Movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be prevented from moving, and reaction of the contact can be prevented. It is also possible to prevent the upper back left decorative body 3220 and the upper back right decorative body 3240 from returning, and ensure that the moving effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 abut and unite is achieved. Can be entertained to control the decline in interest.

  In addition, the upper back left decoration body 3220 and the upper back right decoration body 3240 can be made to emit light by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper back left decoration board and the upper back right decoration board according to the game state. Therefore, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be highlighted to attract the player's interest strongly, and the decoration and movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 The top rear left decoration 3220 and the top rear right decoration 3240 can be made to emit light and it can make the player think that something is good for the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by raising the sense of expectation for In addition, by providing the upper rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the weight related to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 is increased, and the gravity and inertia force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 are increased. Also, as described above, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. The upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be prevented from moving unintentionally by the upper back left decoration substrate and the upper back right decoration substrate, and the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back left decoration 3240 can be prevented. It is possible to make the desired effect with high rendering effect on the upper rear right decoration body 3240, and to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest. Rukoto can.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the accommodation case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodation case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodation recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. The roller 3254 is pressed by the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 to the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by rotating the 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the storage case 3251 is applied through the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the storage case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Between the containing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, when the housing case 3251 is rotated, the output member 3253 is rotated through the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the projecting portion 3252 a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated by a strong force from the output side, a slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is reduced to the upper rear left Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper back right drive motor 3234 side and released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and can not be unlocked, or the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration It is possible to prevent the body 3240, the output member 3253, and the storage case 3251 from being damaged, and to embody the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exerts the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower right side of the lower central elevator base 3121 and the lower central elevator base 3121 in the front view gaming area 5a. The elevating base 3171 is lowered respectively, and the sliders etc. (slide mechanism) attached to the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 respectively produce the left side rotary ornament 3153 and the right side rotary ornament 3173 is slid outward in the left-right direction, and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operating unit 301 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a is retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 is visible at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, and the lower front center decoration 3111 (lower rear center decoration at the lower center within the game area 5a The body 3122) and the four rotating ornaments 3126 aligned in the left and right direction of the central movable unit 3125 attached to the top of the body 3122) are visible, and both left and right away from the left and right ends of the row of four rotary ornaments 3126 The left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173 of the lower left side rendering unit 3150 and the lower right side rendering unit 3170 are shown at positions respectively, and the left sub side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 are visible above , Furthermore, an effect operation unit which can be operated by the player on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a. A pressing portion 303 is visible, which is arranged in an annular rotary operation unit 302 in the ring as 01.

  In this state, when the gaming state is changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a (the first special lottery result or the first selected by the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004) Two special lottery results), the four rotating ornaments 3126 that are aligned on the upper side of the lower front central ornament 3111 are rotated, or the four rotating ornaments are aligned horizontally by the lower central lift base 3121 The lower left slide drive motor and the lower right side of the lower left side rendering unit 3150 or the rotation of the four rotating decorations 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121. The lower right slide drive motor or the like (slide mechanism) of the rendering unit 3170 causes the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right The left side rotation decoration 3173 slides in the left and right direction, the left side rotation decoration 3153 and the right side rotation decoration 3173 rotate, and the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 Side rotating decoration 3153 and right side rotating decoration 3173 are arranged side by side with four rotating decoration 3126 and left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rising, left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 Because the player can show the player the movable effect that the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotates or plays, the player can be displayed as the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorations 3126) and the left side rotating decoration 3153 Right side rotating ornament 3173 and left sub side rotating ornament 3155 It is possible to focus on the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  In addition, when the lower central lift base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower back central decoration 3122 is made to emit light to cause the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light, thereby displaying a downward arrow light emission, or the lower central lift The base 3121 is raised, and a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration substrate cause the lower back central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light, thereby causing a large downward arrow to be emitted, or a pair of lower left side elevators Since the larger downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light by raising the base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 and causing the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light, the light emission can be displayed. The player can be entertained also by the effect, and the light emitting display is directed downward. It is possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301 by the mark, it is possible to urge the operation of staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the player participates in the effect by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302, rotating the rotation operation unit 302, pressing the pressing operation unit 303, or the like. Can be entertained.

  Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation types of effects as described above can be performed, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to predict the effect pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by the unexpected effect being performed, and the player Can be controlled to suppress the decline in interest for the game.

  In addition, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right side rotary ornaments 3173, and the pair of left subside rotary ornaments 3155 and the right subside rotary ornament 3175 are extended in the left and right direction, respectively. The player side is rotated because each of them has four decorative parts 3127, three decorative parts 3154 and three decorative parts 3156 which are different from one another in the circumferential direction, respectively. It is possible to change the facing surface (the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156), and to change the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a variously to entertain the player. Also, when the four rotating ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornaments 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotating ornaments 3155 and the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 are stopped rotating, By stopping their rotation so that the combination of the decorative part 3127, the decorative part 3154, and the decorative part 3156 facing the player becomes a predetermined combination, various messages are displayed as decoration to the player. Since it is possible to present, the possibility of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player has an advantage by the combination of the decorative portions 3127, the decorative portions 3154, and the decorative portions 3156 which are stopped rotating. By representing (expected value), each of the four rotating ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 according to the gaming state When the right side rotation decoration 3173 and the pair of left sub-side rotation decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 are rotated, the combination of the decoration 3127, the decoration 3154, and the decoration 3156 with higher expectation value is rotated. Depending on whether or not the game is stopped, the player can be excited and excited, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the lower rear central decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3122 a arranged in the vertical direction and capable of emitting light independently of each other, one light emitting area 3122 a can be simultaneously emitted. A downward arrow can be displayed in a luminous manner, and by repeatedly emitting light from the plurality of light emitting areas 3122a in order from the top, the player's line of sight is directed to the effect operation unit 301 below by the light emission flowing from the top to the bottom. It can be made easy to guide, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be further urged to allow the player to reliably operate the effect operation unit 301.

  Furthermore, since the ring-shaped rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring are provided as the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed on the player. Since the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be performed, the pattern of the player participation type effect can be diversified by appropriately combining the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the player To make it difficult to get tired and to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is surrounded by the rotation operation unit 302, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased. The large rotation operation unit 302 can strongly attract the player's attention. Therefore, as described above, when the line of sight of the player is guided downward by the light emission display of the downward arrow by the lower back central ornament 3122 or the lower front central ornament 3111, the rotation operation unit 302 (press operation unit 303 Therefore, the player can strongly urge the player to operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303, and can enjoy the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, since the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302, as described above, the light emission display of the downward arrow by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 When the player looks at the lower side of the arrow, the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen, so the possibility of the advantageous gaming state occurring to the player by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 While being able to strongly press the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to surely press the pressing operation unit 303, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of people with disabilities.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to be in a lowered state and in a projecting state, the pressing operation unit 303 appears to be largely noticeable when the pressing operation unit 303 is projected. It is possible to make the player think that the possibility of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous is high. On the other hand, since the pressing operation unit 303 is less noticeable when the pressing operation unit 303 is lowered, the player can be reminded that the possibility of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is low, and the pressing operation unit 303 The player's advance / retraction position allows the player to indicate the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state.

  In addition, since it is possible to suggest the possibility (expected value) that the advantageous gaming state will occur to the player by the advance / retraction position of the pressing operation unit 303, as described above, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 or the lower front When the downward arrow is lighted and displayed by the central decorative body 3111 or the like, the player can be snarled and pounded by whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, and the expectation of the player is enhanced and the pressing operation is performed. The pressing operation of the portion 303 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image in the center of the front view game area 5a is provided, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 Also, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed at the rear of the lower movable effect unit 3100 and at the center of the front view gaming area 5a in the front view game area 5a, the lower central elevator base 3121 is combined with the lower rear central decorative body 3122 according to the game state. The left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament together with the lower left side ornament 3152 and the lower right side ornament 3172 by raising the four rotating ornaments 3126 or by the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower right side elevation base 3171 When the body 3173 is lifted, a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, etc. Four rotating ornaments 3126 and left side rotating ornaments for the player Since it is possible to notice the rise of the 3153 and the right side turn decoration 3173 etc., it is possible to surely show the player the effect using them, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest .

  In addition, since the effect image can be displayed at the center in the front view gaming area 5a, as described above, the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower back center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, the lower right side The effect image for prompting the player to operate the effect operating unit 301, the effect operating unit, or the like when the player is prompted to operate the effect operating unit 301 below by making the downward arrow light-emitted by the decorative body 3172 or the like The effect operation unit 301 is displayed to the player by displaying an effect image that explains the operation of the 301, an effect image that indicates the relationship between the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous and the effect operation unit 301, and the like. It is possible to strongly encourage participation in player participation type effects for operating the game, and to make it easy to operate the effect operation unit 301, and enjoy player participation type effects. The reduction of interest can be suppressed Te.

  Further, as described above, since various effects of the combination can be shown to the player, for example, the lower central lift base 3121 and the lower left side lift base 3151 and the lower right side lift base 3171 are usually lowered. From the state, when the left and right left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornaments 3173 are moved to the center in the left and right direction by slide mechanisms such as the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right slide drive motor, The left side rotation ornament 3153 and the right side rotation ornament 3173 are positioned on the left and right sides of the row of three rotation ornaments 3126, and the four rotation ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotation ornaments 3153 and the right side rotation ornament Since the body 3173 and the side-by-side are in line, it is possible to surprise the player and enjoy the player. It can be. In this state, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right side rotary ornament 3173 are raised by the lower central elevation base 3121 and the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower right side elevation base 3171. , Four rotating ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and a right side rotating ornament 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating ornaments 3155 and right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction It is possible to show the player a large decoration that crosses the inside of the game area 5a, which gives the player a strong impact, and it seems that there may be something good. It is possible to increase the feeling of expectation for the game. Then, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right side rotary ornaments 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotary ornaments 3155 and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 can be used in appropriate combinations. In the state where they are lined up, when rotating them after rotating them, the combination of each decoration 3127, decoration 3154, decoration 3156, depending on whether or not the rotation is stopped in the desired combination is harahara · pounding pounding It is possible for the player to enjoy the rotation (the movable effect) of the four rotating ornaments 3126 and the like, and also to stop the rotation of each of the decorative portions 3127 and the like in a desired combination, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. It is possible to convince the occurrence of “A”, to increase the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, and to suppress the decrease in interest. After that, the lower back central decoration 3122 (lower front central decoration 3111), the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 cause the downward arrow to light up and display operations of the player's line of sight downward. It can be guided to the part 301, and the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation part 301. At this time, since it is possible to indicate the possibility (expected value) that the advantageous gaming state may occur depending on the size of the downward pointing arrow that is illuminated, if the illuminated arrow is small, the process continues for the player. It can be thought that it can be rolled by the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and since generation of the advantageous gaming state can be convinced if the arrow by which the light emission is displayed is small, the expectation for the game can be enhanced in any case. It is possible to enjoy the subsequent operation of the effect operation unit 301 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the movable effect unit, the rotary decorative body 3126 which is rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right and has a plurality of (four) decorative portions 3127 different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed Although the four concentrically illustrated ones are shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rotating decorative body which is rotatable around an axis extending up and down and in which a plurality of decorative parts different from each other in the circumferential direction are formed It may be one having at least one, one having at least one rotary decoration rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, one having at least one movable decoration sliding in the lateral direction, etc. .

  In the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used as the upper back left decoration body 3220 and the upper back right decoration body 3240 which are moved up and down through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is limited thereto Instead, the clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between the drive motor and the movable decorative body moving in the left-right direction, the movable decorative body rotating around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, or the like.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the roller 3254. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation from the drive motor The first sun gear, the first planetary gear, and the rotation connected to the drive motor side. And a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear connected to the first sun gear, a second planet gear, and a rotatable rotary ring gear connected to the first sun gear. Between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, a carrier provided with supporting shafts for supporting the both on both sides is disposed, and the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism are provided. There are may be those adapted to be transmitted at a reduced speed rotation from the drive motor provided the difference in the number of teeth on the rotating ring gear between at least one gear of the ring gear and the sun gear.

[14. Stock time production]
Hereinafter, the stock time effect implemented in the present embodiment will be described.
[14-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described. FIG. 154 is a table showing an example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also referred to as the special view 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as the special view 2. Also, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are generically referred to as a special symbol. Also, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are generically referred to as a special symbol variation or simply as a variation. The special lottery results in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 include a big hit and a small hit. The big hit of the special figure 1 includes "2R time short non symbol 1" and "6R time short premium symbol 1".

  Moreover, the small hit in the special figure 1 includes "7R time short possession symbol 1" and "7R time short possession symbol 2". The details will be described later, but during the small hit game won by the first special symbol lottery, when the first large winning opening 2005 is opened, so-called right-handed and hitting the gaming ball B into the first large winning opening 2005, In the small hit game, the game ball B enters a specific area in the first large winning opening 2005 at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). That is, winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is substantially equivalent to obtaining an opportunity to win a one-third chance at a big hit with time reduction.

  When the game ball B enters the specific area and the small hit is over, the big hit game of 6 rounds (class is "7R time short stock symbol 1" and "7R time short stock symbol 2", but the small hit is in the middle Since the opening of the first large winning opening 2005 is counted as one round, the big hit game is six rounds) starts, and the time saving state starts when the big hit game is over. If the game ball B does not enter the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game does not start, and no time saving is given.

  In the example of FIG. 154, the big hit probability of “6R hour short owned symbol 1” in the first special symbol lottery is extremely low (205/65536 × 4/200). In addition, the big hit winning rate (600/65536 × 1/3) of the small hit in the first special symbol lottery is much higher than the big hit probability of "6R time short owned symbol 1", and in the big hit all over the small hit Status is granted.

  In addition, since the game ball B does not enter the second starting opening 2004 or enters the ball with a very low probability during the non-shorting state, the second special symbol lottery is not basically executed. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 154, most of the rushing occasions from the non-short time state (excluding the second special symbol variation of a predetermined number of times immediately after the end of the short time state. Details will be described later) are by the first special symbol lottery. It is a big hit via small hit.

  The big hit of the special figure 2 includes "4R time short owned symbol 1" and "15R time short present symbol 1". Moreover, the small hit in the special figure 2 includes "5R time short possession symbol 1", "16R time short possession symbol 1", and "16R time short presence symbol 2". The details will be described later, but during the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery, when the first large winning opening 2005 is opened and so-called right hitting and hitting the gaming ball B in the first large winning opening 2005, The game ball B enters a specific area in the first large winning opening 2005 at a very high probability (for example, 1/1) in the small hit game.

  When the game ball B enters the specific area and the small hit ends, if the type of the small hit is “5R time short owned symbol 1”, the big hit game of 4 rounds, the type of the small hit is In the case of "16R hour short possession symbol 1" or "16R hour short possession symbol 2", a big hit game of 15 rounds starts, and when the big hit game is over, the time saving state starts. That is, winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is substantially equivalent to winning a big hit with time reduction. If the game ball B does not enter the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game does not start, and no time saving is given.

  In this chapter, the termination trigger of the time saving state is the end of the second special symbol variation for the fourth time after the start of the time saving condition, and the eighth special symbol variation after the start of the time saving state (that is, the first special symbol The total number of changes in the change and the second special symbol change is the first among the end of 8) or the start of a big hit game. It is needless to say that even if the time saving state is ended by the start of the big hit game, if the big hit is a big hit with time saving, it will enter a new time saving state again after the end of the big hit game.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, by entering the game ball B into the second starting hole 2004 during the fourth special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state, a maximum of four of the fourth special characters until the fluctuation ends. Two special symbol variations can be reserved. That is, after entering the time saving state, it is possible to execute up to eight second special symbol variations. According to the big hit probability in the example of FIG. 154, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit is about 54.9% in four second special symbol lottery executed during the short time state, but the short time state and the short time The probability of winning a jackpot or jackpot in a total of eight second special symbol lotterys held after the end rises to about 79.7%.

  In other words, the fluctuation time during the second special symbol fluctuation of the fourth time (the last fluctuation of the short time) in time-short is long enough to cause the game ball B to enter the second starting opening 2004 (specific fluctuation As the second special symbol variation is executed in the 5-8th non-time-short state by doing time later will be described), raising the withdrawal rate without raising the so-called pullback probability during the time-short state Can.

  In addition, the condition of "the end of the special symbol fluctuation (that is, the total number of times of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8) of the eighth time since the start of the time saving condition" Is included for the following reasons. Although not shown, even in the case of winning the big hit of "2R time short symbol 1" in the first special symbol lottery during time saving, time saving is given after the end of the big hit game.

  Temporarily, if the condition is not included in the termination timing of the time saving state, the second special symbol variation is executed only three times during the time reduction, and if the big hit or the small hit is not won, the second special symbol variation If you continue to carry out the first special symbol variation, rather than execute 5 more times, a situation may occur where the payout rate rises. Therefore, in order to prevent such capture, the condition is included in the termination timing of the time saving state.

  In addition, the number of times of "eight times" is adopted under the condition (the total number of changes of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is eight) due to the following reason. In order to prevent the capture described above, the number of times needs to be set as small as possible.

  On the other hand, if it is assumed that the number of times is seven times, for example, the game is satisfied when the condition that time saving is provided in the state where four first special symbol fluctuation suspension is stored in the non-time-short normal state The person is satisfied with the grant of the time saving, and may stop the game, such as giving a rest break or reporting to a friend. In this way, when the game is stopped and the time saving state is started, the first four special symbol variations will be saved, so the second special symbol variation can be executed up to three times in the time short status. It will be disadvantageous for the player. In addition, when the player plays a game not to hold the first special symbol change in fear of occurrence of such a situation, there is a risk of delaying the progress of the game. Also in the case where the number of times is six or less, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol fluctuation can be executed up to three times or less depending on the number of pending first special symbol fluctuations at the time of the big hit. Therefore, it is desirable that the number of times under the condition is eight.

  As described above, the condition (the total number of changes in the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is eight) is included in the termination timing of the time saving state in order to prevent the capture described above . In addition, such capture is possible when the condition is not included in the end condition of the time saving state, only in the time saving state, in the first special symbol lottery "2R time short non symbol 1 Even if the player wins a "big hit", the time saving status is given after the big hit game is over. Therefore, if time reduction is not given after the end of the big hit game even if the big hit of "2R time short null symbol 1" is won during time saving state, such a capture can not be performed from the beginning, in this case, The condition does not have to be included in the termination timing of the time saving state.

  FIG. 155 is a table showing an example of opening and closing time patterns of the big winning opening, which are selected in each round of the big hit game or the small hit game. Patterns A and B are patterns of the opening time and closing time of the second big winning opening 2006 in which the opening and closing operation is performed during the big hit game, and both are patterns in which one operation of closing after opening for a long time is executed. .

  Pattern C is a pattern of the opening time and closing time of the first large winning opening 2005 in which the opening and closing operation is performed during the small hit game won by the first special symbol lottery, and the operation closing after opening for a short time It is a pattern to execute. During the small hit game, the game ball B entering the first large winning opening 2005 reaches the sorting member (character item) entering the specific area with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), The route through which the game ball B passes through the distribution member is also referred to as a feature route.

  The pattern D is a pattern of the opening time and closing time of the first large winning opening 2005 in which the opening and closing operation is performed during the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery, and the operation closing after opening for a short time several times It is a pattern to execute. The game ball B enters the specific area with extremely high probability (for example, 1/1) without reaching the distribution member described above, since the game ball B entering the first large winning opening 2005 enters the distribution. The route for entering a specific area without passing through a member is also called a direct V route.

  In addition, in each pattern, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B enter the open special winning opening during the opening time, the pattern is displayed even if the opening time has not ended. Transition to the indicated closing period. Specifically, for example, in the pattern A, when ten gaming balls B enter the second large winning opening 2006 before 29.000 seconds have elapsed since the second large winning opening 2006 was opened. A closing period of 2.000 seconds starts, and the round ends with the end of the closing period.

  FIG. 156 (A) is a table showing an example of the time of hit start effect (also referred to as opening effect), and (B) is a table showing an example of the time of final hit effect (also referred to as ending effect). The opening effect is an effect to be performed between the start of the big hit game or the small hit game and the start of the first round of the big hit game or the small hit game. The ending effect is an effect to be performed between the end of the final round of the big hit game or the small hit game and the end time of the big hit game or the small hit game. In the example of FIG. 156, for each pattern, the opening presentation time and the ending presentation time of the winnings during the short time state and the short time state are defined.

  FIG. 157 is a table showing an example of an operation schedule of the big winning opening in the big hit game. In the table of FIG. 157, the time of opening effect, the opening pattern of the big winning opening of each round, and the time of ending effect in each jackpot type are defined.

  In the start j column, the time of the opening effect is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (A). In the section indicating each round, the release pattern in the round is defined by the identifier shown in FIG. Moreover, "lower" in the said column shows that 2nd big prize winning opening 2006 opens in the opening time in the said round. In the final y column, the time of ending effect is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (B).

  In addition, big hit via small hit (that is, "special figure 1_7R time short symbol design 1", "special figure 1_7R time short symbol design 2", "special figure 2_5R time short symbol design 1", "special figure 2_16R time short ratio symbol 1", And in the "special figure 2, 16R time special symbol 2"), the opening time of the first round is not defined because there is an opening of the winning opening of one round during the small hit game, which is one round It is to be treated as an eye. In the said big hit game, when opening production ends, it moves to the 2nd round.

  In addition, the pattern of the 5th round of "special figure 2_16 R time short owned symbol 2" is B. The pattern B has a long closing time for the big winning opening compared to the pattern A selected in the other rounds (pattern A: 2.000 seconds, pattern B: 9.000 seconds). For example, at the end of the second special symbol change winning “special figure 2_16R hour short symbol 2”, a notification as if it were won as “special figure 2_5R hour short regular symbol 1” is executed (for example, In the long closing time (9.000 seconds) in the fifth round, the big hit is “special figure 2_16R hour short symbol symbol 2” in the decoration display corresponding to FIG. You may perform the promotion production which announces that there was.

  As a result, even if the notification that the jackpot is won for the fifth round is executed at the end of the fluctuation, it is possible to obtain an expectation that the player has won the jackpot for the sixteenth round. Further, for a player who is not conscious of the promotion effect, the promotion effect can provide a sense of exhilaration.

  FIG. 158 is a table showing an example of an operation schedule of a large winning opening in a small hit game. In the table of FIG. 158, the time of opening effect, the opening pattern of the big winning opening of each round, and the time of ending effect in each small hit type are defined. In the example of FIG. 158, all the small hits are composed of an opening effect, one round, and an ending effect.

  Similar to FIG. 157, in the start j column, the time of the opening effect is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (A). Further, in the column indicating each round, the release pattern in the round is defined by the identifier shown in FIG. Moreover, "right" in the said column shows that the 1st big prize winning opening 2005 opens in the opening time in the said round. In the final y column, the time of ending effect is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (B). In addition, the pattern of the round of the small hit won by the first special symbol lottery is C (character route), and the pattern of the small hit won by the second special symbol lottery is D (direct V route).

[14-2. Small hit game]
Hereinafter, the small hit game executed in this chapter will be described. First, the operation of each part in the first large winning opening 2005 during the small hit game will be described. FIG. 159 is an enlarged front view showing an example of an outline of a configuration in the first big winning hole 2005. Note that the shapes, sizes, and the like of the respective components in FIG. 159 may be exaggerated for the convenience of description, and they do not necessarily match the other drawings. Further, for the convenience of description, FIG. 159 does not show all the members provided in the first large winning opening 2005 and around the first large winning opening 2005.

  In the first big winning opening 2005, for example, a first structure 2061, a second structure 2062, a specific area 2063, a side wall 2064, a side wall 2065, and a distributing member 2070 are provided. The first structure 2061 is disposed, for example, immediately below the first large winning opening 2005 in a front view. The first structure 2061 is, for example, a sphere having a recess capable of holding only one game ball B. Even if a game ball B newly entered into the first big winning opening 2005 collides with the game ball B already held in the recess, the game ball B is not deep enough to fly out of the recess. It is desirable that the recess has a height.

  In addition, the first structure 2061 is a movable body in which the recess is directed to the second structure 2062 at the initial position. When the first structure 2061 is in operation, the first structure 2061 rotates leftward in a front view about the center of the sphere so that the recess is in the top direction.

  Therefore, when the game ball B enters the second large winning opening 2006 with the first large winning opening 2005 open and the depression of the first structure 2061 facing upward in the front view, the gaming ball B Only one is held in the recess of the first structure 2061. In the state where one game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061, even if the game ball B enters the first large winning opening 2005, the game ball B is held in the recess. Instead, it is discharged to the lower left region of the first structure 2061 and does not go to the specific region 2063. Similarly, even if the game ball B enters the first large winning opening 2005 with the first structure 2061 in the initial position, the game ball B is not held in the recess, and the first structure 2061 It is discharged to the lower left area and does not go to the specific area 2063.

  Further, in a state where only one game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061, when the first structure 2061 rotates in the right direction of the front view and returns to the initial position, the game ball B is secondly Head towards structure 2062. The second structure 2062 is a member that can be opened and closed. When the game ball B reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is open, the game ball B falls downward in a front view of the second structure 2062 and finally enters the specific area 2063. . In addition, when the game ball B reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is closed, the game ball B passes on the second structure 2062, and the front view lower right direction of the second structure 2062 Toward the distribution member 2070 disposed in

  The sorting member 2070 includes, for example, a bottom portion 2071, a front wall portion 2072, a front wall portion 2073, and a rotating portion 2074. The bottom portion 2071 is surrounded by the side wall portion 2064 and the side wall portion 2065 at both ends in the left-right direction in a front view, and its shape is, for example, a disk shape.

  The front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073 are arranged at left and right ends of the bottom portion 2071 on the front side of the front view. Also, for example, a first opening formed between the side wall 2064 and the front wall 2072, a second opening formed between the front wall 2072 and the front wall 2073, and a front wall 2073. The positions of the front wall 2072 and the front wall 2073 in the left-right direction are defined at positions where the sizes of the third openings formed between the side wall 2065 and the side wall 2065 are substantially the same.

  The rotating portion 2074 has, for example, a rotating shaft portion and a ball unit attached to the side surface of the rotating shaft portion. The rotating unit 2074 flips the game ball B which has collided with the ball unit by rotating at high speed centering on the rotating shaft unit.

  The game ball B that has reached the distribution member 2070 collides with the front wall portion 2072, the front wall portion 2073, the side wall portion 2064, the side wall portion 2065, the ball portion of the rotating portion 2074 and the back wall of the game area 5a. Pass through the first opening, the second opening, or the third opening. The game ball B that has passed through the first opening enters the specific area 2063. The game balls B having passed through the second opening and the third opening are discharged to the area under the distribution member 2070 and do not go to the specific area 2063.

  In addition, the distribution is performed so that the probability that the game ball B having reached the distribution member 2070 reaches the first opening, the second opening, and the third opening is substantially the same (one third). The position, shape, and size of each portion in the member 2070, and the rotational speed and rotational direction of the rotating portion 2074 are determined.

  FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing an operation schedule of the movable body in the first big winning opening 2005 during the small hit game. The horizontal axis of the timing chart of FIG. 160 shows the elapsed time from the small hit game start. In the timing chart of FIG. 160, the ON and OFF states of the first big winning opening 2005 indicate the open state and the closed state, respectively, and the ON and OFF states of the first structure 2061 indicate the post-operation state (first In the state where the recess of the structure 2061 faces upward in a front view), the initial position (where the recess of the first structure 2061 faces toward the second structure 2062), the second structure 2062 is turned on and off The states indicate the open state and the closed state, respectively.

  First, the operation schedule of the movable body in the small hit won in the first special symbol lottery will be described. In the small hit won in the first special symbol lottery, the first large winning opening 2005, the schedule shown by "first large winning opening (feature route)" in FIG. 160 ("special figure 1_7R time short proprietary symbol 1 in FIG. 158 "And is the same as the schedule shown in" special figure 1_7R time short symbol 1 "" and operates.

  When the small hit game starts, an opening effect of 3000 ms is executed, and thereafter, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened in the schedule shown by the pattern C of FIG. In a period in which the first large winning opening 2005 is open (except for the first opening), the first structure 2061 is in the ON state. Thus, when the game ball B enters the first large winning opening 2005 during the period, the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061.

  The first structure 2061 is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed since the last opening of the first large winning opening 2005 in the small hit game has ended. Further, at the timing when the first structure 2061 is switched to the OFF state, the second structure 2062 is in the OFF state. As a result, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061 is directed to the distribution member 2070. Therefore, when the game ball B is made to enter the first large winning opening 2005 during the small hit game, one game ball B is made to enter the specific area 2063 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). be able to.

  In addition, since the closing period (19.364 seconds (pattern C1 in FIG. 155)) between the first opening and the second opening of the first large winning opening 2005 is long, the closing period is also performed at the end of the first opening. One structure 2061 is once turned off.

  Subsequently, an operation schedule of the movable body in the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery will be described. In the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, the first large winning opening 2005 is the schedule shown in the “first large winning opening (direct V route)” in FIG. 160 (“special figure 2_5R time short symbol in FIG. 1 ”,“ special figure 2_16R short time special symbol 1 ”, and“ special figure 2_16R time short same pattern as indicated by schedule 2 ”operate. In the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery, both the first structure 2061 and the second structure 2062 operate.

  When the small hit game starts, an opening effect of 3000 ms is executed, and thereafter, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened in the schedule shown by the pattern D of FIG. In a period in which the first large winning opening 2005 is open (except for the first opening), the first structure 2061 is in the ON state. Thus, when the game ball B enters the first large winning opening 2005 during the period, the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061. The first structure 2061 is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed since the last opening of the first large winning opening 2005 in the small hit game has ended. Furthermore, the second structure is turned on for a predetermined time from the timing at which the first structure 2061 is turned off, and the second structure 2062 is turned off after the predetermined time has elapsed.

  As a result, the gaming ball B whose gaming ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061 reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is open, and enters the specific area 2063. Therefore, when the game ball B is made to enter the first large winning opening 2005 during the small hit game, one game ball B is made to enter the specific area 2063 with extremely high probability (for example, 1/1). be able to. That is, the first structure 2061 and the first structure 2061 are on a schedule such that the game ball B holding the game ball B in the recess of the first structure 2061 reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is open. The second structure 2062 operates.

  In addition, since the closing period (5.420 seconds (pattern D1 of FIG. 155)) between the 1st opening of the 1st big winning a prize opening 2005 and the 2nd opening is long, even at the end of the 1st opening, One structure 2061 is once turned off.

  In addition, for example, in the small hit game won by the first special symbol lottery and the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery, the last opening of the first big winning opening 2005 is after the start of the small hit game. During the time until the end, an effect is presented that urges the game ball B to enter the first large winning opening 2005 by so-called right hitting using the effect display device 1600 or the like.

  In the example of FIG. 160, the time from the start of the small hitting game to the time when the first large winning opening 2005 opens continuously in a short period (the opening period after the second) comes The direct V route is shorter than the object route. This is due to the following reasons.

  The direct V route is selected only when the small win is won by the second special lottery, and when the small win is achieved by the second special lottery, all the direct V routes that can win the jackpot with a very high probability are selected Ru. Also, the second special lottery is basically performed only during the time saving state or immediately after the end of the time saving state. That is, the winning of a small hit in which the direct V route is selected is substantially equal to the winning of the big hit. Therefore, in order to make the player feel a sense of speed of the big hit, the period in which the first large winning opening 2005 opens continuously in a short period after the small hit game where the direct V route is selected starts. The time until the arrival of (the second and subsequent opening periods) is set short.

  In addition, also about the small hit game which is temporarily elected by the 2nd special symbol lottery, it is not the direct V route, but in the case where the ratio where the character article route is selected is high, after the small hit game starts, the first big prize It is desirable that the direct V route is longer than the feature route for the time when the period in which the mouth 2005 opens continuously in a short period (the second and subsequent opening periods) arrives. In this case, since the rate at which the direct V route is selected is low and the jackpot can be won with a very high probability when the direct V route is selected, the time for the direct V route is extended. Thus, the player can be given a sense of rarity and an uplifting feeling. In other words, whether it is intended to make the player feel the speediness of the big hit continuous loafers, or whether it is intended to be entertained by the movement of the gaming ball whether or not a substantial big hit can be obtained by the feature route. The time may be set appropriately according to the purpose, such as.

  Hereinafter, an example of a detailed effect in the small hit game when the small hit game is won in the first special symbol lottery in the non-short time state will be described. For example, during the first special symbol change winning a small hit game, a battle effect using the effect display device 1600 is executed, and an allied character loses the battle effect. Subsequently, a resurrection effect in which a new ally character participates in the battle is performed. In the resurrection effect, the new ally character emits a line such as “I will fight with me!” And the like on the effect display device 1600 at the time of symbol determination of the first special symbol variation, a battle effect by the ally new ally character. Stop the decorative symbol (ie, the small hit finalized symbol) which indicates that it is decided that it will be executed. In addition, for example, it is not necessary to always display a meaning indicating defeat, such as displaying a line such as “Believe your own power!” On the effect display device 1600 etc. Needless to say.

  Subsequently, for example, simultaneously with the start of the opening effect of the small hit game, a small display on the upper right of the effect display device 1600 is performed to urge so-called right-handling. Simultaneously with the end of the opening effect, on the effect display device 1600, the battle effect of the friend character and the enemy character is started, and the attack and defense between the friend character and the enemy character is performed.

  Subsequently, for example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, after 15 seconds) from the start of the closing period of the first first special winning opening 2005, a display prompting the effect display device 1600 to hit the right is performed. In addition, attack and defense of the friend character and the enemy character continue at this time. Also, a small right-handed display may be deleted at the same time as a large right-handed display, or these two right-handed displays may be simultaneously displayed. At the same time as the end of the opening effect, a timer may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to indicate the remaining time until a large right-handed display is displayed.

  Since the closing period of the first first big prize winning opening 2005 is 19.364 seconds, the player immediately starts right-handing when there is a large right-handed indication on the effect display device 1600 from the start of the small-hit game. Although there is a risk that the game ball B can not be won for a long time in the first large winning opening 2005, the payout rate may decrease, and the game interest of the player may decrease. Therefore, as described above, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the closing period of the first first special winning opening 2005, a display for urging the effect display device 1600 to make a large right strike is performed. In other words, even if you are right-handed, the purpose of "right-handing" is the same, but the display mode is different in the extremely difficult and easy states where it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening. ing.

  Subsequently, when it is determined that the game ball B is directed to the sorting member 2070 (specifically, for example, a sensor for detecting the ball entering the game ball B to the first large winning opening 2005, or the first structure 2061 (In the case where detection is performed by a sensor that detects that the game ball B is held in the depression)), a mode is displayed in which the allied character is powered up in a battle effect. Further, at this time, a display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 indicating that the right-handed display on the effect display device 1600 may be deleted, or a right-handed event such as “right-handed completion!” May be ended. You may

  Subsequently, when the game ball B having reached the sorting member 2070 reaches the specific area 2063, the effect that the allied character has won the battle is executed on the effect display device 1600 and the game ball B having reached the sorting member 2070 When the player can not reach the specific area 2063 (that is, when it passes through the second opening or the third opening), the effect that the teammate character loses the battle is executed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, in the small hit won in the second special symbol lottery, for example, in the closing period (5.420 seconds) of the first large winning opening 2005, if the winning during the stock time described later stock release In the case of a win during the final rock mass production, which will be described later, a display effect that greatly sways to the right is performed simultaneously with the start of the closing period.

[14-3. Stock time production summary]
Hereinafter, an outline of the stock time presentation will be described. FIGS. 161 to 163 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the outline of the stock time effect. FIGS. 162 and 163 show an example of the outline of the effect when stock can be obtained in the stock time effect.

  FIG. 168 is a table showing an example of the variation time of each of the first to fifth second special symbol variations after the start of the short hours state. The fluctuation time in the case where the first to fifth fluctuation is a lost fluctuation is 205 seconds, 1 second, 1 second, 15 seconds, and 1 second, respectively. In addition, the fluctuation time in the case where the first to fifth fluctuation is the fluctuation (that is, the big hit or the small hit fluctuation) is 215 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. In this way, regardless of the special symbol fluctuation, the first fluctuation has a longer fluctuation time than the other fluctuation.

  The stock time effect is an effect to be executed after the end of the big hit game with time reduction. FIG. 161 (A) shows a state in which an ending effect of a big hit game with time saving is performed. In the example of FIG. 161, it is assumed that there is no suspension of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation at the end of the big hit game. In addition, the big hit is not a big hit won in the special symbol lottery during the stock time production and the final rock production in the later mentioned (that is, the condition that time saving is given in the first special symbol lottery in non-short time state) If you meet

  In (B), when the ending effect of the big hit game is over, and the time saving state is started, a display to urge the player to hit the game ball B in the second start port 2004 by performing a right hit (“right hit !!” (Hereinafter also referred to simply as right-handed display) is displayed in the lower and upper right portions of the effect display device 1600. Note that, for example, the rightward display at the lower part of the effect display device 1600 is larger in size than the rightward display in the upper right part (not limited to this, for example, a display with a different color from the surrounding It may be displayed in any manner that is easy for the player to recognize, such as or blinking display.

  In (C), the gaming ball B enters the second starting hole 2004 in the state of (B), and the second special symbol variation starts as the first special symbol variation after the big hit end. Simultaneously with the start of the second special symbol variation, the effect display device 1600 displays that the stock time effect has started. In addition, the player performs a right strike to save the second special symbol fluctuation suspension.

  (D) is a state after 5 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation. After 5 seconds from the start of the second special symbol variation, a timer indicating 200 seconds remaining is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the remaining time of the timer decreases with the lapse of time. At the same time as the display of the timer, the display showing that the stock time effect in (C) has started is erased. After the display indicating that the stock time effect has started is erased, a display indicating that the stock time effect is being performed is displayed, for example, at the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600. Note that the timing at which the display indicating that the stock time effect has started in (C) is deleted may be after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds) from the display of the timer. In addition, the player performs a right strike to save the second special symbol fluctuation suspension.

  (E) is a state where the remaining time of the timer is 185 seconds (that is, 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation), and is a state in which four second special symbol fluctuation is reserved. When the second special symbol variation suspension is stored, the rightward display on the lower part of the effect display device 1600 is erased. The right-handed display in the upper right portion, for example, is always displayed during the time saving state.

  In addition, the decoration pattern changes simultaneously with the start of the second special symbol change, and the dummy change of the decoration pattern is performed in 20 seconds from the start of the decrease of the timer value. With the dummy variation of the decorative symbol, for example, as in the state of (E), it appears as if the decorative symbol has stopped as if it were a combination of loses (specifically, for example, a combination of loses is not completely stopped without stopping The effect is to repeat one or more of the effects such as displaying in a swaying manner, and starting the variation of the decorative symbol again. In the dummy change, instead of the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol, it may appear as if the predetermined image for the dummy change is stopped.

  (F) is a state where the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation). The dummy variation of the decorative pattern is finished, and the jaunting game production starts. After the end of the dummy change, the decorative symbol continues to change until the symbol is determined.

  In addition, although details will be described later, when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the peripheral control MPU is notified of the suspended special symbol fluctuation transmitted from the main control MPU. With reference to the special symbol advance determination command, it is determined in advance whether or not each of the reserved special symbol variations is a hit variation (that is, a big hit variation or a small hit variation).

  The peripheral control MPU is included in the second special symbol fluctuation that is suspended when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation) and the second special symbol fluctuation that is in progress ( That is, based on the total number (hereinafter, also referred to as the stock number) of fluctuation per first special symbol fluctuation is not targeted, the effect after 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation is determined.

  In addition, the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds at the time of (F), and peripheral control MPU has won several jaunt game effects of 15 seconds or 30 seconds and the jaunt game effects of this 180 seconds of effects. If configured to use a 15-second stock appeal rendition, which is subsequently performed. Every time you win by winning the game, you will be informed that there is a fluctuation in one hit (stock). Although the details will be described later, the number of times the combined effect (also referred to as stock effect) of the winning effect (also referred to as a stock success effect) and the stock appeal effect is performed is less than the number of unannounced stocks.

  162 and 163 illustrate an example in which the number of stocks is two. In addition, the second special symbol variation being executed is a lost variation (ie, the second special symbol variation has a variation time of 205 seconds), and one of the winning variations is the second following the second special symbol variation being executed. 2 Special symbol variation shall be made.

  (G) is a state where the first jangken game rendition is being performed. (H) is in the state of winning the first jyanken match. In the following description, it is assumed that the hand displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600 is the hand of the ally character, and the hand displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. The first jackpot game production is executed using 15 seconds from 180 seconds to 165 seconds of the remaining time of the timer.

  (I) is a state where stock appeal production performed after victory production of Janken game production is performed. It is notified to the effect display device 1600 that the first stock has been acquired (indication “stock GET × 1 !!” in the drawing). The first stock appeal effect is executed using the remaining time of the timer for 15 seconds from 165 seconds to 150 seconds.

  In (J), the stock appeal effect is finished, and the second jangken game effect is started. An indication (ST in the figure, hereinafter also referred to as a stock indication) indicating that there is a stock notified by the stock appeal effect is displayed, for example, at the upper left of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the stock display, for example, until the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the stock, or until the start or end of the game corresponding to the stock (if the hit corresponding to the stock is a small hit, It may be the start or end of the big hit game that is triggered by the small hit).

  In addition, for example, in the stock appeal rendition, when notifying a large hit of “15 R hour short symbol symbol 1”, a small hit of “16 R hour short symbol symbol 1” or the like, a predetermined ratio is given. A premium effect may be executed (for example, notification by a character dedicated to premium effect, etc.). In this case, the stock display at the upper left of the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the stock appeal effect may be in the premium mode (for example, a character dedicated to premium effect is displayed, etc.).

  (K) is a state in which the stock time has ended, that is, 205 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the second special symbol fluctuation which is a loss fluctuation is ended. The effect display device 1600 displays a combination of decorative symbols that are lost. As described above, since the stock number is two, one more stock is notified by the end of the stock time, and at the end of the fluctuation, two stock displays are displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600.

  In the example of (K), the left decoration pattern is “5”, the middle decoration pattern is “2”, and the right decoration pattern is “4” as a combination of lost decoration patterns, but stock is notified. In the case of lost change in the running state, even if the dedicated combination of decorative symbols that reminds of a hit (for example, the left decorative symbol and the right are the same numbers and the central decorative symbol is “V”) stops Good. In addition, although the stock is not notified in stock time, the dedicated combination may be stopped at a predetermined rate even when there is a hold corresponding to the fluctuation in the hold.

  (L) in FIG. 163 shows a state in which the second special symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 10 seconds; see FIG. 168) which is the second fluctuation which is the small hitting fluctuation has started. In (M), the combination of the decorative symbols indicating a small hit is stopped, and an effect (display of “stock release !!”) indicating that one stock has been released is executed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of (M), the stock indication corresponding to the 1st stock is erased at the end of the second special symbol change. If the stock display is in the premium mode, the stock release effect may also be in the premium mode (for example, notification of stock release by a character for exclusive use of premium effect, etc.).

  (N) is a state where a small hit game has started. In order to cause the game ball B to enter the specific area 2063 in the first large winning opening 2005, a large right-handed display at the lower part of the effect display device 1600, and "Aim for V !!" Display a prompt to target a specific area in 2005. (O) is a state in which the big hit game has started by the game ball B entering the specific area 2063 during the small hit game. Even if the jackpot game starts, the stock display corresponding to the unreleased stock is not erased.

  In the example of FIG. 162, although one stock was notified in one stock appeal presentation, when there are a plurality of unannounced stocks, a plurality of stocks are notified in one stock appeal presentation. May be In the case of informing a plurality of stocks in the stock appealing effect, an effect different from that in the case of informing one stock may be executed. For example, it is preferable that a plurality of stocks be notified by a notification by a plurality of stock notification characters, a dedicated sound effect, a dedicated lighting pattern by various lamps, or the like.

  Moreover, when alerting | reporting a several stock, you may perform a Janken production different from normal Janken production. For example, when a special ally character or enemy character appears and wins the direction of Janken, the case of winning the Janken with a combination of predetermined hands (eg, when the friendly character is "Par" and the enemy character issues "Go") ) Or a special form of ally (for example, a hand in which the little finger and the ring finger are folded and the other finger is extended), the effect pattern is determined such that a plurality of stocks are determined. It may be

  In the example of FIG. 162 and FIG. 163, the second special symbol variation of the first variation is an example of a lost variation, but the second special symbol variation of the first variation is a hit variation (the variation time is 215 seconds). In some cases, stock release is signaled using 10 seconds after the end of stock time.

  FIGS. 164, 165, 166 and 167 show the case in which no stock can be obtained in the stock time effect, that is, the second special symbol variation being held and the second special symbol variation being executed. An example of the outline of the stock time presentation is shown when the total number of hits per change (stock) is zero. Even when the stock can not be acquired, the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (A) to (F) are the same. Subsequently to FIG. 161 (F), a transition is made to the state of FIG. 164 (G ').

  (G ') is a state in which the first jaunting game effect is being performed. (H ') is a state where it was defeated by the 1st Janken match. The first jackpot game production is executed using 15 seconds from 180 seconds to 165 seconds of the remaining time of the timer. Since it was defeated by the Janken game, stock appeal production is not performed.

  (I ') is a state where the second jangken game rendition has started. (J ') is a state in which the stock time has ended, that is, 205 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the second special symbol fluctuation which is a loss fluctuation is ended. On the effect display device 1600, a combination of lost design symbols is displayed. Further, as described above, since the stock number is zero, the stock display is not displayed at the upper left of the effect display device 1600 at the end of the fluctuation.

  (K ') is a state where the second special symbol variation of the second variation, which is a lost variation, has ended. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the lost design symbols has stopped. Further, the display of the end of stock time of the effect display device 1600 remains.

  (L ') of FIG. 165 is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the third variation which is the loss variation is finished. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the lost design symbols has stopped. Further, the display of the end of stock time of the effect display device 1600 remains.

  (M ') is a state where the second special symbol variation of the fourth variation, which is the loss variation, has started. In addition, as described above, the second special symbol fluctuation, which is a loss fluctuation, has a short fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation (1 second), but the fluctuation time of the fourth fluctuation second special symbol fluctuation, which is a loss fluctuation. Is longer than these (15 seconds). The holding charge presentation is performed using this fluctuation time.

  For example, the holding charge effect starts simultaneously with the start of the second special symbol variation. At the start of the hold charge effect, for example, a right-handed display similar to FIG. 161 (B) is displayed at the bottom of the effect display device 1600, and a hold charge start display indicating that the hold charge effect has started is displayed at the center Prompts the player to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. The hold charge start indication is, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls B enter the second starting port 2004 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of hold charge effect, or when a predetermined number (for example, one or four with the maximum number of hold) enters. Is erased.

  (N ') is a state where the second special symbol variation of the fourth variation, which is a lost variation, has ended. When all four of the second special symbol variations are stored, a display (“full charge !! in the figure”) is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, indicating that all the reserves have been stored, and the effect is displayed. The right-hand display displayed at the bottom of the device 1600 is erased. Since the said change is loss change, the combination of the decoration pattern of loss is displayed.

  (O ') is a state where the fifth fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 1 second) which is the loss fluctuation has ended. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the lost design symbols has stopped. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation during the non-time-shorting state, and the effect before the final rock mass production described later is composed of four time-shorting fluctuations and one time-shortening fluctuation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 164, although the fifth variation is an example of a loss variation, if the first to fourth variation is a loss variation and the fifth variation is a hit variation, the fourth variation is The hold charge effect is not executed in In this case, a dedicated effect ranging from the second variation to the fifth variation is performed, and a hit is notified at the fifth variation.

  Therefore, in principle, when all of the first to fifth changes are lost, the on-hold charge effect and the final rock effect effect described later are executed. However, if the winning corresponding to the 5th fluctuation is performed after the start of the 2nd fluctuation, or if it is performed after the pre-read determination timing in the 1st fluctuation, the 5th fluctuation is the hit fluctuation and Also pending charge production is executed. It should be noted that the winning corresponding to the 5th fluctuation is performed after the start of the 2nd fluctuation or after the timing at which the pre-reading is determined in the 1st fluctuation, and the 1st to 4th fluctuation is a lost fluctuation and the 5th fluctuation If the hit is a change, the dedicated effect is not executed, and the hit is notified suddenly at the fifth change.

  When this special effect is performed, the second fluctuation time is 1 second, the third fluctuation time is 1 second, the fourth fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and the fifth fluctuation time is 10 seconds. (See Figure 168). Among the fluctuations in which the special effects are performed, the total fluctuation time of the second to fourth fluctuation which is the lost fluctuation is longer than the fluctuation time of the fifth fluctuation which is the hit fluctuation. Thus, since the fluctuation time of the fifth fluctuation which is the hit fluctuation is short, it is possible to secure a long time for executing the effect by the dedicated effect using the second to fifth fluctuation, and to execute the attraction full of interest Can.

  Although details will be described later, if there is a change from the first change to the fourth change, stock effects necessarily occur during the 180 seconds of the first change, which is a 180 seconds spanking effect. Further, as described above, when the first to fourth fluctuation is a loss and the fifth fluctuation is a hit, the dedicated effect is performed from the second fluctuation. Therefore, when the stock effect does not appear in the first change and the dedicated effect does not start from the second change, the change up to the fifth change is a loss decision. If the second, third, third, and fourth changes other than the fourth change in which the holding charge effect is performed is a lost change, a short change time (1 second) is selected, and the fourth change holds the second special symbol change The time to make the maximum storage is secured for a long time (a time longer than the second, third and fifth fluctuation items).

  Although an example in which the presence or absence of stock is notified by Janken production has been described, it is needless to say that the presence or absence of stock may be notified also by an effect different from Janken production, for example, background change presentation or line effect. . Even in such a case, it goes without saying that the expectation may differ depending on the type of the effect such that the line effect has a higher expectation as the stock effect than the background change effect.

  Hereinafter, the effects of the sixth to eighth fluctuation will be described. The final rock rendition is executed using the sixth to eighth fluctuation, which is the fluctuation reserved at the fourth fluctuation. If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a change from the sixth to the eighth fluctuation based on the special symbol advance determination command, the final rock mass production ranging from the sixth change to the earliest corresponding one of the fluctuation, Execute as a continuous rendition (However, if the sixth fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, execute a final rock rendition production using only the sixth fluctuation).

  In addition, if the peripheral control MPU determines that there is no change from the sixth change to the eighth change based on the special symbol pre-determination command, it continuously produces the final rock mass production from the sixth change to the eighth change. Run as.

  The peripheral control MPU may determine the effect contents with reference to the special symbol advance determination command, either during execution of the fourth or fifth fluctuation or at the start of the sixth fluctuation. The peripheral control MPU, for example, refers to the special symbol pre-determination command at a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation) of the fourth change in which the hold charge effect is performed. And the like can be displayed in a high expectation mode (for example, red letters). In addition, if the predetermined time has elapsed, there is a high possibility that the sixth to eighth fluctuations have been reserved. In addition, since the change time of the fourth change is longer than the change time of the fifth change, such pre-reading effect can be easily performed.

  For example, in each variation in which the final rock production is performed, a rock mass game is performed. In the final rock production direction, in the fluctuation notifying the hit, the player wins the victory in the rock, and in the fluctuation notifying the loss, he loses the battle in the rock fighting.

  However, if the 7th or 8th fluctuation is the first per capita fluctuation, the ratio for which Aiko is selected by the fluctuation before the pervious fluctuation in the final rock mass production is the case of all 6th to 8th fluctuations The ratio is higher than the rate at which Aiko is selected at the 6th or 7th fluctuation. That is, Aiko in the final rock production is a chance pattern. Note that, for example, Aiko may be selected in both of the sixth and seventh fluctuations only when the eighth fluctuation is the first hit fluctuation, that is, in both the sixth and seventh fluctuations. If that is the case, the eighth variation may be hit and determined.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 165, 166, and 167, the sixth and seventh fluctuations are lost fluctuations, and the eighth fluctuation is a fluctuation, that is, the final rock span from the sixth to the eighth fluctuation. The effect is executed as a continuous effect, and a hit is notified at the eighth change.

  FIG. 169 is a table showing an example of fluctuation time of each of the second special symbol fluctuation from the sixth time to the eighth time after the time saving state starts. When the sixth to eighth fluctuations are lost, the fluctuation times are 225 seconds, 160 seconds, and 375 seconds, respectively. In addition, when the sixth to eighth fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation, the fluctuation time is 370 seconds, 305 seconds, and 380 seconds, respectively. In addition, when the sixth to eighth fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, the fluctuation time is 425 seconds, 360 seconds, and 440 seconds, respectively.

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. (P ') is a state where the sixth fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 225 seconds) which is the loss fluctuation has started. On the effect display device 1600, a display indicating that the final rock mass production has been started is displayed.

  (Q ') is a continuation state of (P') in the 6th change which is a losing fluctuation. A display (“first game !!” in the drawing) indicating that the first “Janken match” of the final “Janken production” starts is displayed on the presentation display device 1600. Further, on the effect display device 1600, a gauge indicating the physical strength of the enemy character is displayed. When a hit is notified, the value of the gauge becomes 0, and at the time of a chance pattern (for example, when it is out of the way), the value of the gauge decreases.

  FIG. 166 (R ') shows the state following (Q') at the sixth fluctuation, which is a losing fluctuation. A production that defeats Janken is executed. The value of the gauge has not decreased because it was defeated by Janken. (S ') is a state at the end of the sixth fluctuation which is a loss fluctuation. The display indicates that the final rock production is still going on ("still still !!" in the figure), and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost has stopped.

  (T ') is the state where the seventh fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 160 seconds) which is the loss fluctuation has started. An indication (“second game !!” in the drawing) indicating that the second “Janken match” of the final “Janken production” starts is displayed on the presentation display device 1600. (U ') is the continuation state of (T') in the 7th change which is a loss change. Strange productions are being performed in the Janken match. As mentioned above, Aiko in Janken is a chance pattern. As shown in (U '), for example, the value of the gauge is decreased when it is bad.

  (V ') is a state at the end of the seventh fluctuation which is a loss fluctuation. Since Aiko, which is a chance pattern, is executed at the 7th change, a display showing that the final rock production is still going on and the high expectation for victory in the rock at the next change (“You see your hand out next in the figure "!" Is displayed. Moreover, the combination of the loss of a decoration pattern is displayed.

  (W ') is the state where the eighth fluctuation which is the hit fluctuation (if it is a big hit, the fluctuation time is 440 seconds, and if it is a small hit, the fluctuation time is 370 seconds or 385 seconds) has started. An indication (“final game !!” in the drawing) indicating that the third or final jangken game of the final jangken production starts is displayed on the production display device 1600.

  FIG. 167 (X ') shows the state of continuation of (W') in the eighth variation which is the hit variation. On the effect display device 1600, a display for prompting the player to continuously hit the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. At this time, a display may be displayed that suggests that the victory effect will be approached by a series of hits, such as “A player's hand is missing!” Or the like. In addition, such a continuous hit representation may be performed in the sixth and / or seventh variation, for example, when the hit expectation is higher than a predetermined value. In addition, for the eighth variation, for example, the continuous hit representation may be performed regardless of the hit expectation.

  (Y ') is the continuation state of (X') in the eighth variation which is the hit variation. After continuous pressing of the central pressing operation portion 303a is prompted (that is, after the central pressing operation portion 303a is activated), one of the predetermined number of pressings of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the elapse of a predetermined time is satisfied. At the point of time, it changes to the state of (Y '). The predetermined number of times may be set smaller as the hit expectation degree is higher, and may be set smaller as the hit expectation degree is lower. In (Y '), an effect to win the game is won. Further, the value indicated by the gauge displayed on the effect display device 1600 is zero.

  (Z ') is a state at the end of the eighth fluctuation which is the hit fluctuation. On the effect display device 1600, the combination of the decorative symbol stops, and a message ("Congratulations!" In the drawing) indicating that it is a hit is displayed.

  As mentioned above, a series of effects consisting of stock time and holding charge is executed using the fluctuation of the short time state and the first fluctuation of the start of the short time state (from the start of the short time state to the first to fifth fluctuation in the above example) The final rock chopstick production is performed using the second to fourth variation (in the above example, from the start of the short status to the sixth to eighth variation, that is, the last three second special symbol variations). It is done. Moreover, as described above, even if the average fluctuation time of each fluctuation for which the final rock mass production is performed is a fluctuation for losing, the fluctuation for which the series of effects are performed (from the start of the short time state to the 1st to 5th fluctuation Longer than the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation (see FIGS. 168 and 169). After entering the non-time-short condition, the second special symbol variation, which is more advantageously set with a higher probability of hitting, can be executed only four times at the most, thus causing the player to maintain a sense of expectation in this way. The time is fixed. By setting the fluctuation time of the seventh fluctuation in the seventh fluctuation in FIG. 169 to be more than 215 seconds, all fluctuation times for which the final rock mass production is executed are all fluctuation times for which the series of effects are executed (time It may be set longer than the state start to fluctuation time from the 1st to 5th fluctuation).

  Also, the bifurcation point between the series of effects and the final rock effect effect (at the start of the second change in the non-time-short state) arrives during the non-time-short state for the following reasons. Immediately after falling to the non-time-shortened state, the second special symbol variation having a higher hit probability is implemented up to four times. If the second special symbol change in the first half of the first half (the first example in the example described above) is a lost change, in the second special symbol change in the second half, if the same effect mode as the lost change is executed, The player may not be able to get a sense of expectation for the hit. Therefore, the player's interest can be maintained by changing the effect mode during the non-time-saving state as described above.

  From the viewpoint of maintaining the interest of the player in this manner, it is preferable that the end timing of the series of effects be as early as possible after the non-time-saving start. That is, the end timing is the second end of fluctuation after the start of the non-short time state from the end of the third change after the start of the non-short state (that is, the final rock formation is performed at the fourth change after the start of the non-short state). It is preferable that time (that is, the final rock rendition is performed at the third to fourth fluctuation after the start of the non-short state), and further the first change after the non-short state start after the second change end after the non-short state start It is more preferable at the end of the fluctuation (that is, the final rock formation is performed by the second to fourth fluctuation after the start of the non-short time state).

  In addition, as described above, the peripheral control MPU refers to, for example, the special symbol advance determination command at a predetermined timing of the fourth change to perform the holding charge effect, and suggests the result of the final rock mass effect after the sixth change. The judgment effect may be performed in the fourth variation. For example, it is performed in accordance with the distribution indicated by the judge effect table.

  FIG. 174 shows an example of the judge effect table. The judgment effect table defines the distribution of hand images selected in the judgment effect, for each hold number at the predetermined timing, depending on whether or not there is a fluctuation in the fluctuation held by the predetermined timing. . The distribution has been decided so that the hand with the red aura, the hand with the white aura, and the hand without the aura are in order and the expectation is high.

  A specific example of the judge effect will be described. For example, the image of the hand is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the hold is 0 or 1 before the predetermined timing during the hold charge effect, and when the hold is two, the effect image is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 The image of the hand that does not hold the aura is displayed, and when the hold is three, the image of the hand that does not hold the aura and the hand that wears the white aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the hold is four On the effect display device 1600, an image of a hand not holding an aura, a hand holding a white aura, and a hand holding a red aura is displayed.

  That is, when the hold is from one to two, an image of a hand that does not hold the aura is added on the effect display device 1600, and when the hold is from two to three, the hand that wears the white aura on the effect display device 1600 The image of is added, and the image of the hand holding the red aura is added on the effect display device 1600 when the number of reservations is changed from three to four. In addition, even if hold is added after the predetermined timing, the hand image is not added.

  At the predetermined timing, the peripheral control MPU selects a hand with reference to the judgment effect table. After the predetermined timing, the judgment effect starts, and the peripheral control MPU displays an image of the selected hand on the effect display device 1600.

  In the example of FIG. 174, when the number of reservations is 2, a hand that does not play the aura in the judgment effect is selected. When the number of reservations is 3, a hand which does not beat the aura or a hand which wins the white aura is selected. When the number of reservations is 4, a hand that does not hold the aura, a hand that wears the white aura, or a hand that wears the red aura is selected.

  Therefore, the distribution of the judgment effect table is determined such that the hand finally displayed in the judgment effect is included in the hand displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the predetermined timing is reached. Then, in the final rock production, the teammate character performs a rock picking game with the selected hand. For example, when a hand holding a red aura is selected, the hand of the ally character wears a red aura in all the jyan fights in the final rock production.

  When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, the judgment effect is not executed (no display in FIG. 174). This is because if the change in which the on-hold charge effect is performed is ended while the on-hold number remains 0 or 1, the final rock production effect is not performed.

  In addition, in the fluctuation per hit number 2, extremely small distribution may be set to "white aura" and "red aura". Similarly, in the case of the fluctuation of the number of reservations of 3, the “red aura” may be set to a very small distribution. Specifically, for example, the distribution in the number of changes in the number of reservations 2 is "no indication" is 0, "no aura" is 98, "white aura" is 1, "red aura" is 1, and the number of reservations is 3. The distribution in the hit variation may be made such that “no display” is 0, “no aura” is 50, “white aura” is 49, and “red aura” is 1.

  By setting the distribution in this way, there is a variation in the hit when the hand not included in the hand displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the time when the predetermined timing is reached is selected in the judgment effect. It will be finalized. Also, by setting the distribution at which such a fixed effect is generated small, it is possible to make it a premium effect. Therefore, the player can be given a sense of excitement by the generation of such effects. In addition, when there are four reservations, such a fixed effect does not appear, so it is possible to provide the player with fun as a hidden effect.

[14-4. Information for performing stock time production]
Hereinafter, a table for defining information necessary for performing the above-described stock time effect and the final rock performance will be described. In this chapter, three variation pattern tables (Table A, Table B, and Table C (all not shown)) are stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines the variation patterns. First, one fluctuation pattern table is selected from the three fluctuation pattern tables, and a fluctuation pattern is selected from the selected fluctuation pattern table.

  FIG. 170 is an example of a variation pattern table selection table. The variation pattern table selection table is a table for selecting one variation pattern table from the above-described three variation pattern tables, and is stored, for example, in the ROM in the main control board 1310.

  The variation pattern table selection table is, for example, the state (time saving state or non-time saving state) at the time of winning the most recent big hit (in the case of big hit via small hit), the latest big hit (small hit via small hit). If so, the type of the small hit), the number of changes from the last big hit end of the fluctuation of the selection target fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table, the current state (short or short status), and the selection fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table A migration destination table is defined for each type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of.

  In addition, although the number of times of granting for each type is defined in the variation pattern table selection table, it may be managed in another table. As described above, the termination timing of the time saving state is the end of the change of the fourth special figure 2 after the start of the time short state, and the eighth special symbol variation after the start of the short time state (that is, special figure 1 and special The total fluctuation number in FIG. 2 is the first one of the end of 8) or the start of a big hit game.

  In the example of FIG. 170, the latest big hit is a big hit via a small hit of “special figure 1_6 R time short owned symbol 1”, the small hit is won in the non short time state, the current state is non short time state, The cell corresponding to the fluctuation of the special pattern 2 that is the sixth fluctuation from the end of the big hit is the cell 1651 in the fluctuation pattern table selection table. Therefore, for the variation, the variation pattern is selected from the table A corresponding to the cell 1651.

  Also, for example, the latest big hit is a big hit via a small hit of "special figure 2_16R hour short owned symbol 1", and the small hit is won in the short hit state, the current state is short time, and the big hit end The corresponding cell in the fluctuation pattern table selection table is the cell 1652 to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 which is the second fluctuation from the point. Therefore, for the variation, the variation pattern is selected from the table B corresponding to the cell 1652.

  In the example shown in FIG. 170, regardless of the latest big hit type or the type of change, if the selected object change in the change pattern table (hereinafter also referred to simply as the target change in this chapter) is the change after the 9th change (so-called normal time , Table A is selected. Also, if the most recent big hit is a short time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the sixth to eighth fluctuation after the end of the big hit (in this case, it is non time-consuming). , Table A is selected.

  Also, if the most recent big hit is a short time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and the target fluctuation is the 1st to 8th fluctuation after the end of the big hit (that is, the 1st to 8th fluctuation in the time reduction state) Table A is selected. That is, in the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time saving state, the table A is always selected. In the variation of the special figure 1 during the time saving state, the table A is always selected. Also, if the most recent big hit is a short time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation in the special figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the first fluctuation after the big hit (that is, the first fluctuation in the time saving state), Table A It is selected.

  For example, the variation time of the first variation in the time variation state of the table A in the special figure 2 is 205 seconds in the case of loss variation, and 215 seconds in the case of hit variation. Thereby, the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation (ie, the first fluctuation of the stock time effect) shown in FIG. 168 is realized. Further, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation 1 in the time-short state in the table A is also long as in the special graph 2 (205 seconds in the case of lost fluctuation, 215 seconds in the case of hitting fluctuation). If the variation time of the special figure 1 is short, if the variation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state, it is not possible to enter a sufficient number of game balls B into the second starting opening 2004 This is because there is a possibility that the number of times of the second special symbol variation will be smaller than the scheduled number, which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, also in the special figure 1 change which has such a long change time, the stock time presentation mentioned above is performed.

  In Table A, the fluctuation time when the sixth fluctuation is the special figure 2 is 225 seconds in the case of loss fluctuation, 370 seconds in the case of small hitting fluctuation, and 425 seconds in the case of big hitting fluctuation. In Table A, the variation time when the seventh variation is the special figure 2 is 160 seconds in the case of loss variation, 305 seconds in the case of small hitting variation, and 360 seconds in the case of big hitting variation. is there. In addition, in Table A, the fluctuation time when the eighth fluctuation is the special figure 2 is 375 seconds in the case of loss fluctuation, 370 seconds or 385 in the case of small hitting fluctuation, and 440 in the case of big hitting fluctuation. It is a second. In this way, the variation time during the final rock-temper production shown in FIG. 169 is realized.

  Also, in the example of FIG. 170, when the latest big hit is a short-time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the fifth fluctuation after the big hit end (in this case, in the non time saving state) Yes, table B is selected. Also, if the most recent big hit is a short time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the second or third fluctuation after the end of the big hit (that is, the second or third fluctuation in the time-shortened state) , Table B is selected. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the fluctuation pattern in the table B is 1 second in the case of the lost fluctuation and 10 seconds in the case of the hitting fluctuation. Thereby, the fluctuation of the second, third, and fifth fluctuation shown in FIG. 168 (the fluctuation after the end of the stock time and before the start of the hold charge effect and the fluctuation after the end of the hold charge effect but before the start of the final rock mass production) Time is realized.

  Also, in the example of FIG. 170, the latest big hit is a short time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the fourth fluctuation after the big hit end (that is, the fourth fluctuation during time saving state). If so, table C is selected. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the fluctuation pattern in the table C is 15 seconds in the case of the lost fluctuation and 10 seconds in the case of the hitting fluctuation. Thereby, the fluctuation time of the fourth fluctuation (that is, fluctuation of reserved charge effect) shown in FIG. 168 is realized. As described above, in the example of FIG. 170, in the time saving state, the time saving state is provided when the special hit of “special figure 1_2R time short no symbol 1” is won. However, the hold charge effect is performed for 15 seconds in the case of a lost change.

  FIG. 171 shows an example of a stock time effect block table. The stock time presentation table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The stock time effect block table is executed from the state shown in FIG. 161 (F) (when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, that is, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation) until the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 seconds. Is a table that defines

  The stock time effect block table holds the correspondence between the number of unreported stock, the effect contents of each effect block, and the distribution. The number of unannounced stocks is not reported in the stock time effect before the second special symbol fluctuation in execution among the hit fluctuation in the second special symbol fluctuation in execution and the special symbol fluctuation reserved It is the number of hits per change.

  Specifically, for example, a special symbol variation in which there is no suspension during a non-short time wins a time reduction jackpot, and after the big hit ends the variation of the special figure 2 to start the variation 25 seconds after the start of the variation It is assumed that the suspension of the fluctuation of the four special views 2 is accumulated until later (until the above-described prefetch determination is performed). Further, it is assumed that among the fluctuations of the five special figures 2 in total, there are three fluctuation including the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the fluctuation. In this case, for example, three stocks are notified in the stock time. In addition, when the fluctuation in the fluctuation ends, the jackpot enters into the big hit, and after the big hit ends, it enters the time saving state again. In this case, the player is notified of the presence of the two hit fluctuations excluding the digested hits. Therefore, for example, when one reserve of special figure 2 is newly stored by 25 seconds after the start of the change which starts immediately after the big hit end in this state, if the hold is the change hold, the unannounced stock The number is one, and the number of unannounced stocks is 0 if the suspension is suspension of loss variation.

  Note that 180 seconds from when the remaining time of the timer reaches 180 seconds to 0 seconds is divided into 12 effect blocks of 15 seconds each and managed. That is, each record of the stock time effect block table defines a schedule of effects for 180 seconds by defining the effect contents of each effect block.

  As described in each of the effect block columns (Demonstration 1 to Effect 12), a cross indicates that a 15-second stock failure rendition (i.e., defeat or aiko at a fight with a fight) is executed. In addition, the black triangle is a 30-second stock failure rendering consisting of two adjacent rendering blocks (for example, even if a defeat or aiko appears in a Janken match, it does not execute the Janken rendering from one, but a defeat or aiko It is shown that a series of renditions using 30 seconds will be executed, in which a character is screamed to continue after being displayed! Also, black circles indicate that stock success staging (i.e., winning with a win) is performed for 15 seconds or 30 seconds consisting of two neighboring rendering blocks. Also, the white circles indicate that the stock appeal presentation for 15 seconds immediately after the stock success presentation is performed. Hereinafter, a combination of a stock success effect and a stock appeal effect executed immediately after the stock success effect is also referred to as a stock effect.

  In the example of FIG. 171, the stock effect is not selected in the first and last effect blocks (effect 1 and effect 12) in all of the effect schedules. Temporarily, if stock production is executed immediately after rushing into the time saving state, there is a possibility that the player may feel hurdle, so stock failure presentation is always selected in the first presentation block. In addition, when a stock failure effect is always selected in the last effect block, the player's feeling calms down when no stock is notified in the effect schedule of up to 165 seconds (up to effect 11). be able to. However, regarding the stock appeal in the effect 12, it is executed when the stock effect is performed in the effect 11. In addition, in the effect 9, the stock failure effect is selected in the effect 9. This makes it possible to calm down the feeling of the player who refrained from the last three effect blocks (remaining 45 seconds of effect).

  Further, the stock effect column specifies the stock effect to be executed in the effect schedule. "No stock effect" is selected when the number of unannounced stocks is zero. "Stock effect 1" and "stock effect 2" are selected when the number of unannounced stocks is one. "Stock effect 3" and "stock effect 4" are selected when the number of unannounced stocks is two. The "stock effect 5" and the "stock effect 6" are selected when the number of unannounced stocks is three. The "stock effect 7" and the "stock effect 8" are selected when the number of unreported stocks is four or five.

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. For example, when the unannounced stock number is one, effect numbers 5 to 16 are distributed. In this case, for example, effect number 5 is selected at 64/256, and effect number 9 is selected at 16/256. For example, when the effect number 5 is selected, the stock success effect is performed by the effect 2 (effect which is started 40 seconds after the start of the change).

  FIG. 172 shows an example of a stock effect specifying table. The stock presentation identification table identifies a hit presentation lottery table for drawing stock presentation to be executed in each presentation schedule. The peripheral control ROM stores, for example, an effect extraction table (not shown) for 30 seconds and an effect extraction table (not shown) for 45 seconds.

  The effect drawing table per 30 seconds includes one or more stock effects each composed of a 15-second stock success effect and a 15-second stock appeal effect (total 30 seconds), and the distribution of each of the one or more stock effects. , To store. The effect drawing table for 45 seconds includes one or more stock effects each composed of a 30-second stock success effect and a 15-second stock appeal effect (45 seconds in total), and the distribution of each of the one or more stock effects. , To store.

  That is, for example, when the peripheral control MPU selects the effect of “stock effect 4” in the stock effect column of the stock time effect block table, the peripheral control MPU refers to the stock effect identification table and, for the first stock effect, The contents of the effect are selected in accordance with the distribution of the lottery table per 30 seconds, and the contents of the effect are selected in accordance with the distribution of the lottery table per 45 seconds for the second stock effect.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol pre-determination command for the suspended special symbol variation transmitted from the main control MPU, and the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, that is, 25 seconds from the start of the variation. At the time of passage, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation of each of the reserved special symbol fluctuations. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not each of the reserved special symbol variations has a hit variation.

  In addition, for example, when the main control MPU has transmitted the prior determination command about the pending change, and there is a new start winning combination before the start of the variation, the variation corresponding to the starting winning combination is the hit variation. Alternatively, the advance determination command may be transmitted, and the advance determination command may not be transmitted if the change corresponding to the start winning combination is a loss change.

  Peripheral control MPU, the number of notification stock number subtracted from the total number of per capita fluctuation included in the special symbol fluctuation that is suspended when 25 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed, Calculated as the number of unannounced stocks. The peripheral control MPU realizes the stock time effect described above by determining the effect by selecting the effect corresponding to the unannounced stock number according to the distribution indicated by the distribution column with reference to the stock time effect block table. be able to.

  If the hit fluctuation is suspended after the remaining time of the timer for 180 seconds, notification of the hit fluctuation as a stock is not executed. For example, when the change is not reported as stock, the change is notified at the time of execution of the change.

  However, the peripheral control MPU at a predetermined timing after the time of 180 seconds of the remaining time of the timer (for example, at the end of each rendering block, etc. However, since it takes a minimum of 30 seconds for one stock rendering, 11 and the end of effect 12.), the number of unannounced stocks may be calculated again. In this case, for example, the periphery control MPU replaces a part of stock failure effects of the selected effect schedule with stock effects, or reselects an effect schedule that can notify unannounced stocks, or the like. Change in the middle. In addition, the number of unannounced stock numbers may be calculated again, and the timing of changing the presentation schedule according to the calculation result may be once or plural times.

  In addition, for example, when there is a suspension of fluctuation before the first stock number calculation timing, in principle, a stock effect corresponding to the fluctuation is notified in stock time. In this case, if there is a winning change for suspension of winnings after the first stock number calculation timing and before the second stock number calculation timing, the stock effect corresponding to the hit will be performed in the stock time. The presentation may be changed, or in the next stock time (in principle, the big hit corresponding to the fluctuation before the first stock number calculation timing is given a time reduction to enter the stock time again) You may perform stock production corresponding to the change of the hit.

  In addition, if there is no suspension of fluctuation before the first stock number calculation timing, and there is a winning fluctuation winning after the first stock number calculation timing and before the second or subsequent stock number calculation timing. The effect may be changed so that the stock effect corresponding to the hit is performed in the stock time, or the hit effect may be suddenly performed without changing the effect in the stock time. (E.g., alert on sudden changes).

  Note that, for a player who does not want to be notified of the number of hits in stock time, the above timing may be notified in advance by timer display or the like. In addition, as described above, the number of unannounced stocks is calculated only once (only at the time of 180 seconds of the remaining time of the timer), and the number of hits is notified about the suspension accumulated after that timing. It is possible to provide a silent game feature that can not be played, and to provide stock time rendition including the expectation of the hold for the hold accumulated before the timing.

  In addition, the timing of the said one time is defined so that sufficient time for entering the four game balls B into the second starting opening 2004 can be secured from the start of the fluctuation to the timing of the one. Is desirable.

  Specifically, for example, the time of the interval at which the game ball B is fired is X, and the average time until the game ball B fired when the player strikes the right is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2511 is Y, It is assumed that the probability that the game ball B fired in the case of hitting the right when the second start opening 2004 is opened enters the second start opening 2004 as Z. In this case, for example, the one timing is determined to be Y + (4X / Z) + K (seconds) after the start of fluctuation. However, K is a constant, for example, a margin for time until the player holds the handle and shoots the game ball B, etc.

  In addition, it is desirable that the one timing be in the first half of the fluctuation time. For example, in the above example, if X = 0.6, Y = 5, Z = 0.5, and K = 2, the one timing is 5+ (4 × 0.6 / 0 from the start of fluctuation. .5) + 2 = 11.8 seconds later. That is, it is desirable that the fluctuation time (that is, 23.6 seconds or more) be selected such that 11.8 seconds is the first half of the fluctuation.

  In addition, also about holding charge production, when prefetching is performed at the predetermined timing of the change which performs holding charge production, it is desirable that the said predetermined timing is set similarly. However, as described above, with regard to the suspension charge effect, if four suspension of the second special symbol fluctuation is stored in the stock time effect, the suspension of the second special symbol fluctuation at the start of the fluctuation to execute the suspension charge effect Is at least one remaining state, in this case, it is sufficient if the three game balls B can enter the second starting opening 2004 from the start of the change to the predetermined timing. That is, the predetermined timing may be determined to be Y + (3X / Z) + K (seconds) after the start of the fluctuation. In addition, in the holding charge production, in order to store four of the second special symbol fluctuation holding, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation for which the holding charge production is executed needs to be the time until the predetermined timing comes. . The same applies to the case where the pre-reading effect is not executed in the on-hold charge effect.

  In the example of FIG. 171, when the number of unreported stocks is five, the stock effect is performed four times. However, the stock effect may be performed five times. In addition, when the number of unannounced stocks is five, when the stock effect is performed four times and four stocks are notified, the hit time corresponding to the first to fourth changes is the stock time of the change during the execution. It is assumed that the notification corresponding to the fifth variation is not notified in the stock time effect that is notified by the effect. As a result, since not all hits are necessarily notified in the stock time effect, the player's interest is maintained for the second and subsequent changes. In addition, with respect to the timing at which the stock number of the first change is calculated, some stored loss information (for example, the loss information of the special figure 1) is not included in the unannounced stock (that is, not notified in stock time) It may be

  Further, in the example of FIG. 171, when the number of unannounced stocks is four or less, the same number of stock effects as the number of unannounced stocks are performed. That is, in the example of FIG. 171, one stock is notified by one stock effect, but as described above, plural stocks may be notified by one stock effect. Conversely, part or all of the unannounced stock may not be notified until the start of fluctuation. In this case, for example, in the variation of the hit, an effect of winning the game in reverse may be performed.

  If the 1st to 4th change is a loss change and the 5th change is a hit change (provided that the winning corresponding to the 5th change is performed before the start of the 2nd change) The number of unannounced stocks is one, but when referring to the stock time effect block table, the peripheral control MPU treats the number of unannounced stocks as zero. In this case, as described above, a dedicated effect ranging from the second fluctuation to the fifth fluctuation is performed, and a hit is notified at the fifth fluctuation.

  In the example described above, 180 seconds of stricken production of stock time is a production that suggests the fall of the 1st to 5th change, and the final production of rock mass for the final year is the production that suggests the fall of the 6th to 8th change, This ratio may be changed. Specifically, for example, the 180 seconds of stricken effect of stock time may be an effect that suggests the drop of the 1st to 4th change, and the final rock mass produced by the final Janken may be an effect that indicates the drop of the 5th to 8th change. The ratio of the expectation for winning for 180 seconds in stock time to the expectation for winning for production for final jumping is about 4: 3 in the former, but is about the same as 4: 4 in the latter.

  In addition, when there are already notified stocks and the total of the number of unannounced stocks (assumed to be N) and the number of already informed stock is 5, the peripheral control MPU has N-1 unannounced stock numbers. Alternatively, the presentation schedule may be selected from the stock time presentation block table.

[14-5. Hit with the first special symbol variation during time saving state]
FIG. 173 (A) is an explanatory view showing a time schedule in the case of winning a small hit with the first special symbol variation corresponding to winning in the time saving state, and FIG. 173 (B) corresponds to winning in the time saving state It is an explanatory view showing a time schedule at the time of winning a big hit by the first special symbol change. The first special symbol lottery won during the time saving state will not be notified in stock time as described above. Therefore, when winning is made in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state, for example, an effect different from the effect described above in the corresponding first special symbol variation is executed.

  Specifically, for example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the winning in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state is 1000 ms. Therefore, in Table A in FIG. 170, the fluctuation time is defined. That is, in the hit variation, the decoration pattern changes for 1000 ms. During this time, no other effect is performed on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, for 500 ms, the combination of the decorative symbols on the hit is stopped.

  Subsequently, the hit game starts. In addition, the operation schedule of the structure in each big winning opening and the big winning opening in the hit game is as described above. In addition, the effect performed during the winning in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state is, for example, the same as the effect performed during the winning for the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

[14-6. Multiple types of time saving state]
In the above-described example, the termination timing (i.e., the number of times of short time provision) of the time saving state of all time saving symbols is the same, but the termination timing may be different depending on the winning symbols. For example, "special figure 1_6R special symbol 1", "special symbol 1_6R special symbol 1", "special figure 1_7R special symbol 1", "special figure 2_4R special symbol 1", "special feature 2_5R special symbol 1"",And" special figure 2_16R time short symbol 1 "is referred to as advantageous state giving symbol 1," special figure 1_7R time minor symbol 2 "," special figure 2_15R time minor symbol 1 ", and" special figure 2_16R time minor symbol 2 " Will be referred to as the advantageous state imparting symbol 2.

  In addition, the termination timing of the short time state (hereinafter also referred to as the short time state 1) given by the advantageous state imparting symbol 1 is, for example, as described above, the end of the second special symbol variation for the fourth time after the time short state starts. , The end of the eighth special symbol fluctuation (ie, the total number of changes in the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is eight times) since the start of the time saving state, or the big hit game start, which comes first It shall be done. That is, the number of times of short time given by the advantageous state imparting symbol 1 is one of the second special symbol variation being four times or the sum of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation being eight, whichever is smaller.

  In addition, the termination trigger of the short time state (hereinafter also referred to as the short time state 2) given by the advantageous state imparting symbol 2 is, for example, the end of the 100th second special symbol fluctuation from the start of the short time state, the time short state It is assumed that the 104th special symbol variation (ie, the total of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is 104 times) ends from the start, or the big hit game starts, whichever comes first . That is, the number of times of application of the time saving state 2 is the smaller one of the second special symbol fluctuation of 100 times or the sum of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation of 104 times.

  According to the example of FIG. 154, in the second special symbol lottery that can be easily executed during the time saving state, the probability of winning is 11878/65536 (small hitting probability 11623/65536 + big hitting probability 205/65536) And, since the time saving state 2 continues until the second special symbol variation is performed up to 100 times, in the time saving state 2, it is possible to be almost certainly hit in the second special symbol lottery. That is, to enter the time saving state 2 (i.e. to win the advantageous state imparting symbol 2) is substantially equal to the continuation of the jackpot.

  Hereinafter, fluctuation patterns in the short time state 1 and the short time state 2 will be described. For example, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the time saving state 1 is set to be 40 seconds at the time of hitting fluctuation and 35 seconds at the time of losing fluctuation. However, the final variation of time saving state 1 (that is, the fourth variation of the second special symbol and the eighth variation (the sum of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation) and the variation that arrived earlier ) Is set so that the fluctuation time is 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the lost fluctuation.

  The fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the time saving state 1 is set, for example, to be 40 seconds at the time of hitting fluctuation and 35 seconds at the time of losing fluctuation. However, the final variation of time saving state 1 (that is, the fourth variation of the second special symbol and the eighth variation (the sum of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation) and the variation that arrived earlier ) Is set so that the fluctuation time is 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the lost fluctuation.

  In addition, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the time saving state 2 is determined to be, for example, 2 seconds or 3 seconds at the time of hitting fluctuation and 2 seconds at the time of losing fluctuation. However, the final variation of time saving state 2 (that is, the variation of the 100th second special symbol variation and the 104th variation (the sum of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation) and the variation that arrived earlier In the same manner as in the time saving state 1, the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation and the lost fluctuation is set to be 100 seconds.

  That is, when the fluctuation time in the time saving state 1 and the time shortening state 2 is compared, the fluctuation time in which the time saving state 2 is shorter than the time shortening state 1 is selected in all fluctuations except the final fluctuation.

  In time saving state 2, since the fluctuation time is set extremely short compared to time saving state 1 except for the final fluctuation, it is possible to generate a big hit early. In this way, it is possible to provide a sense of speed in the jackpot. In addition, as a player, it is understood that to enter the time saving state 2 is equivalent to the jackpot substantially continuing. Even if the fluctuation time is taken long, the player can not have a sense of expectation, but there is a possibility that the player may be bored. Therefore, such a short fluctuation time is adopted in the time saving state 2 Is desirable.

  It should be noted that although the fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 3 seconds is selected in the fluctuation per time saving state 2, the selectivity of fluctuation time of 3 seconds is low and the selectivity of fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set high Is desirable. By this, even if a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected (although the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is always selected other than the final fluctuation in the time change state 2), the player is expected to have a hit expectation in the fluctuation. It is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration when the 3-second fluctuation time in which the hit is determined is selected.

  In the time saving state 2, for example, early stage rendering is performed. For example, the ending effect of the big hit game which shifts to the time saving state 2 ends, and the same background as during the big hit game is displayed even if it enters the time saving state 2.

  In the early stage effect, for example, the decorative symbol is changed while the background is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative symbol be displayed small in an inconspicuous area (for example, the upper right portion or the like) on the effect display device 1600. Further, in the time saving state 2, for example, the remaining number of time saving is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, for example, in the state where the number of remaining time saving is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 4 or less), the remaining number of time saving may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 even in the time saving state 2.

  In addition, this early rendition continues, for example, until the first change start of the next time-shortened state 1 or the change immediately before the final change of the time-shortened state 2. In addition, when winning the big hit or the small hit where the time saving state 2 is not awarded in the time saving state 2, also during the big hit game, or the big hit game which is won during the small hit game and the small hit, On the effect display device 1600, the background similar to that of the big hit game provided with the short time state 2 when the early effect is started is displayed, and the early effect continues. Furthermore, it is preferable that the number of rounds of the big hit game executed during the early stage effect be displayed as a total with the round number of the big hit mode when the short time state 2 is given.

  Therefore, in the time saving state 2, it is possible to execute the early stage rendering beyond the maximum number of fluctuations that can be reserved. Further, with these effects, it is possible to realize an effect of an aspect in which the big hit game continues from the start of the big hit game when it first rushes to the time saving state 2 to the end of the early effect. In addition, early effect is executed during the big hit game which becomes the opportunity to shift to the time saving state 2, the early effect is continued and displayed in the ending time of the big hit game, and the early effect is continued even if it shifts to the time saving state 2. May be displayed.

  In addition, even if the change is interrupted, the early rendering is continuously displayed. When the change is interrupted and a predetermined time has passed, the early rendering is ended, and a rendering different from the early rendering (for example, a rendering that specifically shows the current state, etc., such as "now in an advantageous state") It may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, even if it is a case where such a different effect is produced, it is preferable to continue the right-handed display.

  In addition, the fluctuation time is determined to be 100 seconds in both the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 in the hit fluctuation and the loss fluctuation, but the same effect is obtained in both the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 It may be executed. For example, the above-mentioned pending charge effect is an example of the same effect.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1600 Effect display device 3000 Back unit 3300 Top front movable presentation unit 3301 Unit base 3302 Top front drive motor (drive motor)
3303 first link rod 3304 second link rod (link member)
3305 upper stopper 3306 lower stopper 3350 upper front movable decorative body 3351 central decorative body (main decorative body)
3352 First projection decoration (sub decoration unit)
3352a first protruding decorative part (sub decoration)
3352b First connecting rod (connecting member)
3352c Link attachment portion 3353 second protruding decorative body (sub decorative body unit)
3353a second protruding decoration (sub decoration)
3353b Second connecting rod (connecting member)
3353c Link mounting part

Claims (1)

Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information at the time of acceptance of gaming media to a predetermined starting opening;
Advantageous state control means for controlling an advantageous state which starts when the advantageous state start condition is established and ends when the advantageous state end condition is met;
Special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on the lottery information when the special symbol variation start condition is established;
Holding means for storing and holding the lottery information with a predetermined number as the upper limit when the game medium is received at the predetermined start opening but the establishment of the special symbol variation start condition is not satisfied;
And an effect execution means for executing an effect during a special symbol change period by the special symbol change execution means based on the lottery information.
The lottery information is included in the first lottery information acquired at the time of receiving the game medium to the first starting opening included in the predetermined starting opening, and is included in the predetermined starting opening, and is different from the first starting opening There is second lottery information acquired at the time of reception of the gaming media to the second starting opening,
The special symbol variation includes a first special symbol variation based on the first lottery information and a second special symbol variation based on the second lottery information.
After the end of the advantageous state, there is a special period in which a plurality of consecutive second special symbol variations corresponding to the holding of the second lottery information stored by the holding means can be performed,
The effect execution means is different in the second special symbol variation performed in the first period included in the special period and the second special symbol variation performed in the second period included in the special period. A game machine characterized by performing an effect of.